You are on page 1of 266

SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Chapter 1: Functional Description

Applications for analog and digital transmission 6

Operating modes with PLC systems 11

Protection modes 19

Frequency overview 31

Possible ways of using the SWT 3000 16

Service channel 34
Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Contents:

Functional Description ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4


Features at a glance ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Applications for analog and/or digital transmission ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Applications for digital transmission ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Combination of analog and digital interfaces---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Transmission paths---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
FOM (Fibre Optic Modem) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
Connection to the PowerLink PLC System: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Connection to a multiplexer -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Direct connection via optical fibre connection ----------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Mode of operation: analog ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Mode of operation: digital ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Features----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Operating modes with PLC equipment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Single purpose operation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Multi-purpose operation---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Alternate multi-purpose operation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Equipment versions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Broadband version ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Narrow band version-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14
Applications for narrow band devices: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14
Possible ways of using the SWT 3000 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Analog transmission path ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Digital transmission path-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Analog and digital transmission path ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17
Integrated into the PowerLink PLC system--------------------------------------------------------------------------------17
Monitoring --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18
Protection modes-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19
Unblocking mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------20
Possible tripping codes used in the SWT 3000-------------------------------------------------------------------------------20
Description of the operating modes without unblocking mode ------------------------------------------------------------21
Mode1 (Double system protection) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21
Mode2 (Single-phase protection) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21
Mode3 (four commands with priority) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------22
Mode 3a (four independent commands 4iC)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------22
Mode 3b (2plus2) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------23
Mode4 (only one commands active)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------23
Mode 5A “3 commands independent”--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------24
Mode 5D (only for digital line interfaces LID)----------------------------------------------------------------------------25
Description of the operating modes with unblocking mode ----------------------------------------------------------------26
Mode1 (Double system protection) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------26
Mode2 (Single-phase protection) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------26
Mode3 (four commands with priority) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------27
Mode 3a (four independent commands 4iC)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------27
Mode 3b (2plus2) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------28
Mode4 (only one commands active)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------28
Mode 5A “3 commands independent”--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------29
Mode 5D (only for digital line interfaces LID)----------------------------------------------------------------------------30
Frequency overview ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------31
Broadband devices in the VF range [kHz] ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------31
Narrow band devices in the VF range [kHz] ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------31
Frequency diagram for broadband and narrow band devices: --------------------------------------------------------------32
Command duration for single purpose operation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------33

Page - 2 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Double system protection ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------33


Single-phase protection resp. operating mode 4 and M5A --------------------------------------------------------------33
Switching functions Mode 3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------33
Mode 3a, 3b resp. 5A ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------33
Command duration for alternate multi purpose operation ------------------------------------------------------------------33
Remote Monitoring (RM) and Service Channel (SC) ----------------------------------------------------------------------34
RM with analog interface -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------34
RM with digital interface--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------35
Service channel (SC) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------35
The IP network – your gateway to SWT 3000 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------37
Power supply -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------38
Stand-alone unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------38
Integrated unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------38
Index: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------39
Appendix: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------41
List of figures ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------41
List of tables ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------41

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 3


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Functional Description
The object of network protection is to selectively disconnect the faulty part of the system as
quickly as possible in the event of faults occurring in high-voltage systems. As a consequence of
ever higher power station outputs and the increasingly close interconnection of high-voltage net-
works very high demands are placed on network protection systems in terms of reliability and
availability. Network protection systems with absolute selectivity therefore need a reliable and fast
transmission system for the transfer of information between the stations.
The SWT 3000 for teleprotection signaling in analog and digital communication networks of-
fers the required maximum security and reliability together with the shortest command transmission
time. It replaces the two teleprotection signaling devices SWT 2000 F6 and SWT 2000 D.
The device can be used as a “stand-alone” unit or can also be integrated in the PowerLink PLC
system.
Combinations of analog and digital interfaces are possible in both cases. The analog interface is
operated in the VF range. The digital interfaces can be configured for X.21 or G703.1 (64kbit/s) or
G703.6 (2 Mbit/s).

SIEMENS >

SWT 3000 >

LID2 LID1 SAL

OK LIA EAL

S/N

Figure 1: SWT 3000 device with analog interface

Page - 4 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Features at a glance
Table 1: Features at a glance

Feature Digital Analog

Number of commands 8 4
Digital line interface
64 kbit/s (X.21 or G703.1) x ---
2 Mbit/s (G703.6) x ---
Analog line interface
4-wire --- x
2-wire --- x
Fiber optic interface
Long-range (single mode, 1550 nm) x x
Short-range (single mode, 1310 nm) x x
Short-range (multi mode, 850 nm) x x
Transmission paths
Digital network x ---
Direct connection to SDH multiplexer x ---
Direct connection to PDH multiplexer x ---

Fiber optic cable x x


Power Line carrier --- x
Pilot cable --- x
Integrated path protection (1 + 1) x x

Integration into Power Line carrier system PowerLink x x

Redundant power supply (Hot standby) x x

Addressing for increased security x ---

INC (Impulse Noise Compression) --- x


Configuration of SWT 3000 with a service PC (intuitive Windows-
x x
based user interface)
Software-upgrade via service PC (download) x x

Free programmable output allocation x x

Remote access to SWT 3000 devices via TCP/IP link x x

Remote access to SWT 3000 devices via in band channel (SC) x ---
Real-time clock integrated and synchronizable from external
x x
sources (e.g. GPS, IRIGB, NTP) and via the transmission link
Event recorder (date- and time-stamped) with guaranteed data
x x
storage when the power supply is switched off
Remote readout of the event recorder x x

Easy upgrade from analog to digital (and vice versa) x x

SNMP agent for NMS integration x x

Coded tripping for up to four independent commands --- x

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 5


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Applications for analog and/or digital transmission


The SWT 3000 system is used for fast, reliable transmission of several commands for protection
and/or special switching functions in supply networks.
Protection functions: Commands can be transmitted for the protection of two three-phase sys-
tems (double system protection) or one three-phase system with single-
phase protection (single-phase protection). High-voltage power switches
can be operated in conjunction with selective protection relays. This is
designated as a "permissive protection system". Direct switch operation
is also possible. This is known as "intertripping", “transfer tripping" or “di-
rect tripping“.
Switching functions: It is possible to transmit four individual commands. Several commands
can be activated simultaneously. They are arranged according to priority
(input 1, 2, 3, and 4) and output one after the other.
Operating mode 4 Only one of the signal inputs 1 to 3 may be active in this operating mode.
Input 4 has priority and is treated independently of the states of input 1 to
3. This means that if input 4 is active the state of the other inputs in insig-
nificant. If more than one of signal inputs 1 to 3 is active and input 4 is in-
active that is an input error. The idle tone (guard) continues to be trans-
mitted.
3 independent Three signal inputs are available in this operating mode.
commands On the transmit side every possible combination of signal input is as-
signed to a protection frequency. On the receive side each protection fre-
quency can be assigned to one or more signal outputs (1 to 4).
4 independent Four signal inputs are available in this operating mode.
commands On the transmit side every possible combination of signal input is as-
signed to a protection frequency. On the receive side each protection fre-
quency can be assigned to one or more signal outputs. This function is
only available with the coded tripping (CT) feature.
2plus2 mode This mode offers the transmission of two double systems. One is trans-
mitted in the fast permissive transfer trip, the other in the direct transfer
trip using the CT feature.
Information on assignment of the frequencies for the individual operating modes can be found in
the section “Protection operating modes”.

Applications for digital transmission

Two digital line interfaces (LID-1 and LID-2) are available through expansion of the PU3 module
with the interface module to digital transmission paths DLE (digital line equipment).
The hardware interfaces X.21 (up to 64kbit/s), G703.1 (64kbit/s) and G703.6 (2Mbit/s HDB3-
coded balanced or coaxial) can be selected on every LID, although only one can be used per LID.
The LID-1 can be operated alone or jointly with the LID-2 (multipath transmission). Operation with
different line interfaces is possible for LID-1 und LID-2 with multipath transmission. LID-1 is always
used if only one interface is needed.
When using exclusively digital interfaces up to 8 signal inputs can be transmitted transparently to
the distant station with Operating Mode 5D and can be jumpered to signal outputs there. Two in-
terface modules of type IFC-P and/or IFC-D are necessary for this application.

Page - 6 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Combination of analog and digital interfaces

Multipath transmission can also be implemented in the SWT 3000 system by using the analog in-
terface (LIA) and the digital interface (LID-1). This combination, like only analog or only digital
transmission is possible for stand-alone SWT 3000 units and for units integrated (iSWT3) in the
PLC system PowerLink.
You will find a detailed overview of the equipment combinations with the resulting applications
in the section <Possible ways of using SWT 3000>.

Transmission paths

The following transmission paths can be used depending of the nature of the supply networks:
 High-voltage and medium-voltage overhead lines
 High-voltage and medium-voltage cables
 Aerial and (buried) underground cables
 Radio relay routes
 Digital networks (SDH/PDH)
 FO modem
This results in the following possible applications:
Table 2: Possible applications of the SWT 3000
Configuration Option
SWT 3000 stand-alone for analog route digital alternate route
SWT 3000 stand alone for digital route analog or digital alternate route
SWT 3000 integrated in PLC unit PowerLink analog digital alternate route
SWT 3000 integrated in PLC unit PowerLink digital analog or digital alternate route
SWT 3000 stand alone with connection via FOM digital alternate rout
SWT 3000 stand alone with connection via FOM to the Pow- digital alternate rout
erLink
SWT 3000 stand alone with connection of the digital interface analog or digital alternate route
via FOM to a PDH or SDH multiplexer

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 7


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

FOM (Fibre Optic Modem)

With the integrated fibre optic modems (FOM) it is possible to connect a SWT 3000 to the PLC
system PowerLink or to a multiplexer via fibre optic cables. The communication of two SWT 3000
units via fibre optic cables is also possible. A distance from 80 km can be covered.
Two FOM modules for the main and alternate path can be integrated into the SWT 3000. In this
case an other (broadened) backplane has to be used. In this case only one SWT 3000 can be in-
stalled in a module frame.
At slot FOM-1 alternatively the CLE module for the wired analog transmission can be inserted. For
applications without FOM modules the primary backplane is used. With it two SWT 3000 units can
be operated in one module frame.
With the FOM modules the following cases of operation can be carried out:

Connection to the PowerLink PLC System:

SWT 3000 PowerLink


Slot PU3f Slot FOx Slot PU3f

PU3f FOM FOM CSP


<3km
E

Figure 2: Connection of the SWT 3000 via fibre optic cable to the PowerLink

The SWT 3000 is connected via fibre optic cables (for each transmission direction one fibre) to
the PowerLink. The functional performance of the SWT 3000 is like an integrated SWT i.e. all pos-
sible variants with iSWT can be carried out with the stand alone SWT 3000 via fibre optic cables.
The programming of the SWT 3000 in this case is only possible via PowerLink and the ser-
vice program PowerSys. In the PowerLink system two SWT 3000 can be connected via fibre op-
tic cables (iSWT (A) and iSWT (B)). The FOM modules are installed in the slots of the PU3f.
A digital alternate path can be electrical direct connected to the SWT 3000 or optical via a second
FOM.
The S6 control wire for the switch over in the alternate multi purpose operation is transmitted from
the FOM module to the PowerLink.
Fibre optic module: SFP-Module
Fibre type: multi mode with modules using 850nm wave length, single mode with
modules using 1300nm wave length
Wave length: 850 nm or 1300 nm
Opt. connector: LC-connector
Range: approx. 3 km at 1300nm, 550m at 850nm (depending on module type).
LED receiver alarm
2 x LED TX- and RX-Alarm (RX + F6UE-Alarm)

Page - 8 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Connection to a multiplexer

SWT 3000 FOB


Slot PU3f Slot FOx Slot PU3f
FOM FOM X.21
PU3f or
<3km G.703.1
Interface or

Converter
E converter
RS422 G.703.6

Adapter
DLE
O
Power Supply

Figure 3: Connection of the SWT 3000 via optical fibre to a FO Box.

The SWT 3000 is operating via optical fibre and a fibre optic box (FOB) for the interface conver-
sion with a PDH- or SDH-Multiplexer. For each transmission direction a separate fibre is neces-
sary. The FOBox contains the FOM module with the electrical/optical conversion, the interface to
the multiplexer and a power supply.
An adaptor is installed for the conversion from the system connector to the alarm relay, the con-
nectors for the digital interface (X.21/G703.1/G703.6) and the power supply connector.
Fibre optic module: SFP-Module
Fibre type: multi mode with modules using 850nm wave length, single mode with
modules using 1300nm wave length
Wave length: 850 nm or 1300 nm
Opt. connector: LC-connector
Range: approx. 3 km at 1300nm, 550m at 850nm (depending on module type).
LED receiver alarm
2 x LED TX- and RX-Alarm (RX + F6UE-Alarm)
Digital interface X.21, G703.1 or G703.6 selectable with jumpers
Bit rate 64 kbit/s or 2 Mbit/s
Clock FOBox is DTE (for test purpose a switch over to DCE possible)
Power Supply 48 V DC (± 20 %), potential separation 2,5 kV

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 9


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Direct connection via optical fibre connection

SWT 3000 SWT 3000


Slot PU3f Slot FOx Slot FOx Slot PU3f

PU3f FOM FOM PU3f


<80km

Converter
E E

Converter
RS422 RS422
DLE DLE
O O

Figure 4: Optical fibre connection SWT 3000 – SWT 3000

Two SWT 3000 are direct connected via optical fibre. The transmission is carried out with 2Mbit/s.
Fibre optic module: SFP-Module
Fibre type: Single mode
Wave length: 1300 nm or 1500 nm
Opt. connector: LC-connector
Range depending on SFP module and bit rate
LED: Receiver alarm
2 x LED: TX- and RX-Alarm (RX + F6UE-Alarm)
Clock: DTE or DCE adjustable

Mode of operation: analog

F6 Modulation: The principle of F6 modulation (frequency-shift keying FSK) is applied


with the SWT 3000. Therefore only one of the possible frequencies is
ever transmitted. This enables the available transmit power to be used to
the full.
Security: The influence of burst interferences with amplitudes that can be signifi-
cantly greater than the wanted signal is suppressed. This is achieved by
limiting the amplitude of the input signal with the largest possible band-
width and then analyzing the frequency with a small bandwidth. Burst in-
terferences are generated, for example, by lightning strike or by switching
operations in high-voltage systems.
An optimum setting of the evaluation thresholds and the integration times
guarantees maximum security against unwanted tripping and a high de-
gree of reliability at the same time. Protection commands are still trans-
mitted in time despite serious interference.
Coded tripping (CT): The CT function is available for the analog line interface (LIA). The com-
mand codes consist of two simultaneously transmitted trip frequencies
(parallel coding).

Page - 10 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Mode of operation: digital

General The digital line interfaces LID-1 and LID-2 are needed for transmitting the
protection commands over a digital network. The data for the interfaces
RM (Remote Maintenance) and SC (Service Channel) and system-
internal control information are transmitted additionally.
Transmission concept Information is transmitted over the digital interface by means of the peri-
odic transmission of 4 message types of constant length. The messages
have the following priority among themselves:
z Command transmission
z Service channel
z Remote maintenance
z System information
Command transmission Each command message is transmitted 4 times with a Hamming distance
of 4. The receiving end checks whether three identical command mes-
sages have been received. The command is not valid until this check has
been carried out.

Features

z Frequency generation and evaluation by digital signal processor (DSP).


z Full utilization of the available transmit power since only one of the possible frequen-
cies is ever transmitted.
z Burst interferences with significantly greater amplitudes than the wanted signal is
largely suppressed.
z Noise analysis in the unused wanted signal circuits.
z Analog and/or digital line interfaces
z Alternative paths possible by combination of analog and digital interfaces.
z Event memory (Data retention over several days, at least 5 hours)
z It is also possible to read out the event memory remotely via RM or service channel.
z Configuration of the device with PC.

Operating modes with PLC equipment


Power system protection signals can be transmitted over the high-voltage and medium-voltage
overhead line to be protected in conjunction with PLC equipment. For this purpose the devices of
the SWT 3000 system are connected to special inputs and outputs of the PLC unit. In case of using
a PowerLink PLC system it is also possible to integrate SWT 3000 in PowerLink. When using PLC
equipment several variants of teleprotection signaling are possible as described in the following:

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 11


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Single purpose operation

In this operating mode the transmission band of the PowerLink is used exclusively for teleprotec-
tion signaling. The greatest transmission distances are reachable in this mode with maximum secu-
rity against impulse noise and minimum signal transmission time. The following equipment combi-
nations are possible:
1. SWT 3000 remote with VF connection to PowerLink
2. SWT 3000 integrated in PowerLink

Multi-purpose operation

In this operating mode the teleprotection signals are simultaneously transmitted with voice and
data signals. The distribution of the available transmission power between the services to be
transmitted results in shorter transmission ranges with the same signal transmission time as with
single purpose operation. The following equipment combinations are possible:
1. SWT 3000 remote with VF connection to PowerLink
2. SWT 3000 integrated in the PowerLink

Alternate multi-purpose operation

Normal operation: In this operating mode the transmission band is used for the transmission
of voice and/or data so long as there is no protection case. In the idle
state, i.e. the high-voltage system is operating properly the signals of all
services including the guard tone are transmitted simultaneously. The pi-
lot of the PLC system is used as the guard tone in this operating mode.
Protection mode: If a protection command is to be transmitted voice transmission and, de-
pending on the parameters set, data transmission as well is interrupted
briefly while the protection command is being transmitted. The protection
command can thus be transmitted with the full transmission power avail-
able (this only applies to single-channel devices). If a voice connection is
set up it is not interrupted. This operating mode saves frequency space
but results in shorter transmission ranges and higher signal transmission
times than with single purpose or multi-purpose operation. The following
equipment combinations are possible:
Configurations: SWT 3000 remote at short distance with VF coupling to PowerLink. The
connecting cable between SWT 3000 and PowerLink should be kept as
short as possible.
SWT 3000 remote with optical fibre connection to the PowerLink.
SWT 3000 integrated in PowerLink.

Page - 12 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Equipment versions
Equipment is available in broadband and narrow band versions depending on the application.

Broadband version

Application: This equipment version is intended for operation over all communication
paths (4-wire connections ), preferably over PLC links. It offers a high
level of security against impulse interference and interference voltages.
Frequency space: In this equipment version the wanted frequencies are distributed over the
complete frequency space available. In conjunction with PLC transmis-
sion frequency space in the 2.5 kHz or 4 kHz channel arrangement is re-
quired for each operating direction.
With CF and radio relay routes and cable connections an ITU-T voice
band from 0.3 ... 3.4 kHz is used for each operating direction.
VF cable connections The following diagram shows a four-wire connection over a VF cable.
Broadband variants VF1 to VF5 can be used.

SWT 3000 SWT 3000


NFx NFx

T R

R T

NFx Frequency variant VF1 - VF5


T Transmitter
R Receiver

Figure 5: SWT 3000 four-wire connection via VF cable

PLC connections Variants VF1 to VF5 are used in conjunction with PowerLink PLC sys-
tems depending on the assignment of the transmission band.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 13


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Narrow band version

Application: Equipment in the narrow band version can be operated on VF links and
over CF and radio relay routes. Security against impulse noise and inter-
ference voltages is somewhat lower than with the broadband version.
Frequency space: The wanted frequencies are closer together in this equipment version. As
a result up to three of the 4 possible channels (channel 1, 2, 3) can be
operated simultaneously within an ITU-T voice band of 3.1 kHz band-
width (0.3 ... 3.4 kHz).
SWT unit: Each of these channels requires a separate SWT 3000 unit. There is
space for accommodating two SWT 3000 units in an equipment frame.
These two units are totally independent from one another and no compo-
nents are shared.
Multi-purpose: Use in conjunction with PLC transmission is possible in multi-purpose
operation. However, a smaller range (transmit level distribution for all
services) and less security against interference must be expected com-
pared with the broadband version.
Alternate multi-purpose: Use in conjunction with PLC transmission is not possible in alternate
multi-purpose operation.
Channel 4: Channel 4 can be used with a 4 kHz frequency space. Its position in the
VF frequency band is defined so that it is operated in the upper half of the
transmission bands 2.67 ... 3.7 kHz (voice band limitation 2.4 kHz with pi-
lot 2.58 kHz) and 2.1 ... 3.6 kHz (voice band limitation 2.0 kHz with pilot
3.78 kHz). In the second case another four 50 Bd WT channels can be
accommodated between the voice band and channel 4.

Applications for narrow band devices:

4-wire connections The operation of several units in parallel at a connection is possible by


using narrow band devices.

SWT 3000 SWT 3000


NB1 NB1

T R

R T

SWT 3000 SWT 3000


NB2 NB2

T R

R T

Figure 6: Parallel connection of several SWT 3000 units at one connection

Page - 14 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

2-wire connections 2-wire cable connections can be implemented with the narrow band ver-
sions of the SWT 3000.
SWT 3000 SWT 3000
NB12 NB21

T
T

R R

NBx Narrowband Version

Figure 7: Example of a 2-wire connection with narrow band versions

In this case the receiver input of the SWT 3000 is connected parallel to
the transmitter output. Since there is only one wire pair available for the
transmit and receive direction, different frequencies must be used.
The variants listed in the following table are provided for this.
Table 3: Narrow band variants for VF 2-wire connections
Direction Variant NB12: Transmit channel 1 Receive channel 2
Reverse Variant NB21: Transmit channel 2 Receive channel 1
direction
Direction Variant NB13: Transmit channel 1 Receive channel 3
Reverse direc- Variant NB31 Transmit channel 3 Receive channel 1
tion
Direction Variant NB23 Transmit channel 2 Receive channel 3
Reverse direc- Variant NB32 Transmit channel 3 Receive channel 2
tion

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 15


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Possible ways of using the SWT 3000

Analog transmission path

Figure 8: Examples using analog transmission path

Examples 1 and 2:
Pilot cable connections. For operation via pilot cable, two SWT 3000 devices can be linked di-
rectly through the analog inter faces (CLE).
Example 3:
The analog link (CLE) between two SWT 3000 devices can also be a PLC link. Depending on de-
vice configuration, SWT 3000 can be used with PowerLink in alternate multipurpose, simultaneous
multipurpose or single-purpose mode.
Example 4:
Fiber optic connections between SWT 3000 and PowerLink. A short-distance connection between
an SWT 3000 and Siemens’ PowerLink PLC terminal can be realized via an integrated fiber optic
modem. In this case an SWT 3000 standalone system provides the same advanced functionality as
the version integrated into PowerLink. Each PowerLink can be connected to two SWT 3000 de-
vices via fiber optics.

Digital transmission path

Figure 9: Examples using digital transmission path


Examples 5,6,7:
SWT 3000 digital connections. The digital interface (DLE) permits protection signals to be trans-
mitted over a PDH or SDH network.

Page - 16 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Example 8:
Direct fiber optic connection between two SWT 3000 devices. SWT 3000 protection signaling in-
corporates an internal fiber optic modem for long distance trans-mission. The maximum distance
between two SWT 3000 devices is 150 km.
Example 9:
Fiber optic connection between an SWT 3000 and a MUX. A short distance connection of up to 3
km between an SWT 3000 and a multiplexer can be realized via an integrated fiber optic modem.
The multiplexer is connected with the SWT 3000’s FOBox, converting the optical signal to an elec-
trical signal.

Analog and digital transmission path

Figure 10: Examples for using analog and digital transmission path

Example 11:
Alternative transmission routes. SWT 3000 enables transmission of protection signals via two dif-
ferent routes. Both routes are constantly used. In the event that one route fails, the second route
immediately takes over without any loss of time. The digital interface (DLE) permits protection sig-
nals to be transmitted over a PDH or SDH network.
Example 12:
A short-distance connection between an SWT 3000 and Siemens’ PowerLink PLC terminal can
be realized via an integrated fiber optic modem. The multiplexer is connected with the SWT 3000’s
FOBox, converting the optical signal to an electrical signal.

Integrated into the PowerLink PLC system

Figure 11: Examples of integrated SWT 3000

Examples 13 and 14:


An SWT 3000 system can be integrated into the PowerLink equipment. Either the analog inter
face or the digital interface, or a combination of the analog and the digital interfaces, can be used.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 17


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Monitoring
z Operating voltage
The output of commands from transmitter and receiver is disabled in case of failure
to meet the specified operating voltage tolerance.
z Switching command duration
The command outputs are disabled and an alarm triggered if a switching command
with a duration of > 500 ms is received (can be set as a parameter).
z Guard tone failure alarm
If there is no valid command frequency present a guard tone failure alarm is triggered
after about 10 ms.
z S/N ratio
A signal/noise alarm could be triggered (i.e. level ratio with AMP different, not with al-
ternate multi-purpose operation).
z Transmit level monitoring
The level of the transmit amplifier is monitored.
z Operating state
The operating state of the device is displayed on the front panel by means of differ-
ently coloured LED.
z Control contacts for external equipment
A floating normally open or normally closed contact (switchable) is available at the
device terminals for signaling the following alarms:
 Pre- alarm
 Receiver failure alarm
 General alarm
z A signaling module IFC-S can be provided additionally as an option. With the aid of
this module any operation of the local circuit can be signaled externally via an auxil-
iary contact. (Note: maximum 2 interface modules possible)
z Measuring options
Decoupled measuring points at which the operating values can be monitored are ar-
ranged on the modules for start-up and maintenance of the unit.
z Input pulse suppression
Commands to be sent must be applied at the input for at least 1 ms in order to be
accepted as an input signal. This minimum time can be increased to 100 ms in steps
of 1 ms (settable as a parameter).
z Minimum transmission duration
Each command is transmitted for at least 15 ms (settable as a parameter).

Page - 18 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Protection modes
The SWT 3000 system has the following different protective operating modes:
z Operating mode 1 (Double system protection) for the analog and/or digital interface.
The commands can be transmitted coded or uncoded with the application permissive
or direct tripping (selectable).
z Operating mode 2 (Single-phase protection) for the analog and/or digital interface.
The commands can be transmitted coded or uncoded with the application permissive
or direct tripping (selectable).
z Operating mode 3 (four commands with priority) for the analog and/or digital inter-
face. The commands are transmitted uncoded with the application permissive or di-
rect tripping (selectable).
z Operating mode 3a (4iC) for the transmission of four independent commands. The
commands are always transmitted coded with the application permissive or direct
tripping (selectable).
z Operating mode 3b (2plus2). This mode offers the transmission of two times mode 1.
Two commands are transmitted in the fast permissive transfer trip, the other two in
the direct transfer trip using the CT feature.
z Operating mode 4 (only one command active) for analog and/or digital interfaces.
The commands can be transmitted coded or uncoded with the application permissive
or direct tripping (selectable).
z Operating mode 5A (3 independent commands) for analog and/or digital interfaces.
The commands are transmitted uncoded with the application permissive or direct
tripping (selectable).
z Operating mode 5D (8 independent commands) only for operation with digital inter-
faces
Operating modes 1, 2, 3 and 4 were already used in the SWT 2000 F6 system. The new operat-
ing modes 3a, 3b resp. 5A are needed for variants that transmit 4 resp. 3 commands independ-
ently.
Operating mode 5D was previously used in the system SWT 2000 D.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 19


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Unblocking mode

The unblocking mode is a release procedure. Short circuits on overhead lines may cause a dis-
turbance of PLC links. To guarantee in this case the release for the permissive protection device,
the unblocking impulse is used.
If the signal to be transmitted does not reach the other line end, because a short circuit on the line
causes excessive attenuation or reflection of the signal, the receiver recognizes a fault and emits
the unblocking impulse. It is carried out via the interface module IFC-P/D command output 4 and
connected to the unblocking logic of the protection relay ensuring the release (for 10-300 ms) in
case of fault.
SWT 3000 SWT 3000

IFC-x IFC-x

Rx Alarm CO4
t unbl= 10 - 300 ms

Figure 12: Principle of the unblocking mode

The unblocking function is activated when the time for the unblocking impulse is more then 0 ms
(tunbl > 0 ms).

Possible tripping codes used in the SWT 3000

The coded tripping is combining always two frequencies from the VFx_CT variants. For this vari-
ants 7 trip frequencies, the guard and the sync. frequencies are used. Depending on the PLC con-
figuration, the frequencies are transmitted in the VF or IF range. The following table shows the
combinations for the tripping codes C1 up to C16.
Table 4: Possible frequency combinations for the coded tripping commands
Code fGuard fs f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7

Guard
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
f1…f7 trip frequencies from the variants M5A
fs clock synchronizing frequency from the variants M5A

Page - 20 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Description of the operating modes without unblocking mode

The following abbreviations are used in the description of the modes that follows:
uncoded frequency to be transmitted in the uncoded mode: (fg is the guard tone, fs is
the frequency for clock synchronization)
coded frequencies to be transmitted in the coded mode: (fg is the guard tone)
BI[x] Binary input 1...4
Co[x] Command output 1...4

Mode1 (Double system protection)


Table 5: Logic scheme for the Mode1 (Double system protection)
Activated Transm. Transm. Command output in the remote station
Input uncoded coded
all off fg fg ---
BI1 f1 fs+f4 CO1+CO3
BI2 f2 fs+f5 CO2+CO4
BI1+BI2 f4 fs+f6 CO1+CO2+CO3+CO4
BI3 1) x
4)
--- --- --- Alarm signaling
BI4 2) fg fg ---
Usynch fs fs+f7 ---
1) x = No reaction (does not trigger alarm)
2) With AMP operation (PLC connection) signal S6 is also activated (“Energized“) through BI4=on and voice transmission
is interrupted.
4) if an invalid frequency or code is received resp. in case of guard tone alarm

Mode2 (Single-phase protection)


Table 6: Logic scheme for the Mode2 (Single-phase protection)
activated Transm. Transm. Command output in the remote station
Input uncoded coded
all off fg fg CO4
BI1 f1 fs+f4 CO1
BI2 f2 fs+f5 CO2
BI3 f3 fs+f6 CO3
BI1 + BI2 or BI1 + f4 fs+f7 CO1+CO2+CO3
BI3 or BI2 + BI3
or BI1+BI2+BI3
2)
--- --- --- Alarm signaling
BI4 1) fg fg CO4
Usynch fs f1+f4 ---
1) In AMP operation (PLC connection) signal S6 is also activated (“Energized“) through BI4=on and voice transmission is
interrupted.
2) if an invalid frequency or code is received resp. in case of guard tone alarm

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 21


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Mode3 (four commands with priority)

For this mode no coded tripping is available!


In Mode3 the command information is transmitted alternately if more than one of the command
inputs BI1...4 are active. The signal inputs also have different priorities (BI1=Prio1, BI2=Prio2,
BI3=Prio3, BI4=Prio4) i.e.: if several signal inputs are active the sequence in which the commands
are sent is determined by the priority control.
Table 7: Logic scheme for the Mode3 (Switching functions)
activated Transm. Command output in the remote station
Input uncoded
all off fg ---
BI1 f1 CO1
BI2 f2 CO2
BI3 f3 CO3
BI4 f4 CO4
BI1 a/o BI2 f1 a/o f2 a/o CO1 a/o CO2 a/o CO3 a/o CO4 alternating, see 2)
a/o BI3 a/o f3 a/o f4
BI4 alternating
--- --- Alarm signaling 1)
Usynch fs ---
1) if an invalid frequency or code is received resp. in case of guard tone alarm
2) If more than one input is active command transmission is alternating. The sequence in which the command frequencies
are transmitted is dictated by the CO3 priority control. Setting the output extension to >=100ms on the receive side prevents
the output relays releasing during alternating command transmission.

Mode 3a (four independent commands 4iC)

This mode is always transmitted in the coded tripping function!


Table 8: Logic scheme for the Mode3a (4iC four independent commands)
activated Transm. Command output in the remote station 1)
Input coded
all off fg ---
BI1 fs+f4 CO1
BI2 f1+f4 CO2
BI3 f2+f4 CO3
BI4 f3+f4 CO4
BI1 + BI2 fs+f5 CO1 + CO2
BI1 + BI3 f2+f5 CO1 + CO3
BI1 + BI4 fs+f6 CO1 + CO4
BI2 + BI3 f1+f5 CO2 + CO3
BI2 + BI4 f3+f5 CO2 + CO4
BI3 + BI4 f2+f6 CO3 + CO4
BI1 + BI2 + BI3 f1+f6 CO1 + CO2 + CO3
BI1 + BI2 + BI4 f3+f6 CO1 + CO2 + CO4
BI1 + BI3 + BI4 fs+f7 CO1 + CO3 + CO4
BI2 + BI3 + BI4 f1+f7 CO2 + CO3 + CO4
BI1 + BI2 + BI3 + BI4 f2+f7 CO1 + CO2 + CO3 + CO4
Usynch f3+f7 ---
1) If output allocation 1:1 is adjusted

Page - 22 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Mode 3b (2plus2)

The commands 1 and 2 are always uncoded transmitted. The commands 3 and 4 as well as com-
binations from commands 3 and 4 with 1 and 2 are always coded transmitted.
Table 9: Logic scheme for the Mode3b (2plus2)
activated Transm. Transm. Command output in the remote station
Input uncoded coded
all off fg ---
BI1 f1 CO1
BI2 f2 CO2
BI1 + BI2 f3 CO1 + CO2

BI3 fs+f4 CO3


BI4 fs+f5 CO4
BI3 + BI4 fs+f6 CO3 + CO4

BI1 + BI3 f1+f4 CO1 + CO3


BI1 + BI4 f1+f5 CO1 + CO4
BI1 + BI3 + BI4 f1+f6 CO1 + CO3 + CO4
BI1 + BI2 + BI3 f1+f7 CO1 + CO2 + CO3
BI2 + BI3 f2+f4 CO2 + CO3
BI2 + BI4 f2+f5 CO2 + CO4
BI2 + BI3 + BI4 f2+f6 CO2 + CO3 + CO4
BI1 + BI2 + BI4 f3+f4 CO1 + CO2 + CO4
BI1 + BI2 + BI3 + BI4 f3+f5 CO1 + CO2 + CO3 + CO4
Usynch fs+f7 ---

Mode4 (only one commands active)


Table 10: Logic scheme for the Mode4
activated Transm. Transm. Command output in the remote station
Input uncoded coded
all off fg fg ---
BI1 f1 fs+f4 CO1
BI2 f2 f1+f4 CO2
BI3 f3 f2+f4 CO3
BI4 f4 f3+f4 CO4
more than 1 fg 1) fg ---
input activated
2)
--- --- --- Alarm signaling
USYNC fs fs+f5 ---
1) Input error. If more than one input is activated fg is transmitted.
2) If an invalid frequency or code is received, resp. in case of guard tone alarm

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 23


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Explanation:
The PU3f checks the state of input signals BI1...4 from the protection device for plausibility. Only
1 of the signal inputs BI1...3 may be active. If more than 1 of the signal inputs BI1...3 is active and
BI4 is inactive that is an input error (prohibited input combination).
BI4 has priority and is treated independently of the states of BI1...3; i.e. if BI4 is active the state
of BI1...3 is not significant (if BI4 is active the frequency tx_f4 is transmitted regardless of the state
of BI1...3).
The guard tone (fg) is transmitted in the case of an input error and an entry is generated in the
event memory with specification of the “prohibited input combination“.
The Unblocking function can be activated for Mode4 in the same way as with the other operating
modes.

Mode 5A “3 commands independent”

For this mode is no coded tripping available!


3 signal inputs are available for the operating mode “3 commands independent". 9 frequencies
are needed for transmitting “3-commands independent“ via the analog line interface LIA.
At the transmit end every possible combination of signal inputs BI1...3 is permanently assigned
to a protection frequency.
At the receive end every protection frequency can be assigned to one or more signal outputs
(CO1...4).
Table 11: Logic scheme for the Mode 5A (3iC three independent commands)
activated Transm. Command output in the remote station 1)
Input uncoded
all off fg ---
BI1 f1 CO1
BI2 f2 CO2
BI3 f3 CO3
BI1+BI2 f4 CO1+CO2
BI1+BI3 f5 CO1+CO3
BI2+BI3 f6 CO2+CO3
BI1+BI2+BI3 f7 CO1+CO2+CO3
USYNC fs ---
- - Alarm signaling 2)
1) If output allocation 1:1 is adjusted
2) If an invalid frequency or code is received, resp. in case of guard tone alarm

Table 12: Possible output jumper settings in Mode 5A


Receive frequency CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 Explanation
fg X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 Guard tone signaling
f1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI1 active
f2 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI2 active
f3 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI3 active
f4 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI1+BI2 active
f5 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI1+BI3 active
f6 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI2+BI3 active
f7 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI1+BI2+BI3 active
Note: The default program settings are highlighted in bold type
Possible settings:
X = no reaction: The state of the signal output is not affected.
1 = switch on: The signal output is switched on or “retriggered“.

Page - 24 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Mode 5D (only for digital line interfaces LID)

Operating mode 5D is designed exclusively for the digital lines interfaces LID-1 and/or LID-2. In
this mode 1...8 signal inputs and 1...8 signal outputs are available with two IFC modules. The sta-
tes of the signal inputs are transmitted to the distant station transparently and can be jumpered to
signal outputs there.
This operating mode was used in system SWT 2000 D.
Table 13: Possible output jumper settings in mode 5D
idx BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 CO6 CO7 CO8
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1
2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1
3 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1
4 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
255 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1
256 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1
Note: the states of the SYNC signals from LID-1 OR LID-2 can be programmed on CO1...8.
SYSWIN can administer up to 20 jumper settings
Possible settings:
X = no reaction: The state of the signal output is not affected.
1 = switch on: The signal output is switched on or “retriggered“.
The default program setting is 1:1 (“transparent“); i.e.: BI1=CO1, BI2=CO2, ... , BI8=CO8

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 25


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Description of the operating modes with unblocking mode

The following abbreviations are used in the description of the modes that follows:
uncoded frequency to be transmitted in the uncoded mode: (fg is the guard tone, fs is
the frequency for clock synchronization)
coded frequencies to be transmitted in the coded mode: (fg is the guard tone)
tunbl. duration of the unblocking pulse (unblocking inactive when tunbl=0,
unblocking active when tunbl>0)
BI[x] Binary input 1...4
Co[x] Command output 1...4

Mode1 (Double system protection)


Table 14: Logic scheme for the Mode1 (Double system protection) with unblocking mode
Activated Transm. Transm. Command output in the remote station
Input uncoded coded tunbl>0 3)
all off fg fg CO3
BI1 f1 fs+f4 CO1
BI2 f2 fs+f5 CO2
BI1+BI2 f4 fs+f6 CO1+CO2
BI3 1) x
--- --- --- Alarm signaling +Unblocking pulse at CO4
BI4 2) fg fg CO3
Usynch fs fs+f7 ---
1) x = No reaction (does not trigger alarm)
2) With AMP operation (PLC connection) signal S6 is also activated (“Energized“) through BI4=on and voice transmission
is interrupted.
3) if an invalid frequency or code is received resp. in case of guard tone alarm: If tunbl>0 output of the unblocking pulse
(tunbl. = Duration of the unblocking pulse)

Mode2 (Single-phase protection)


Table 15: Logic scheme for the Mode2 (Single-phase protection) with unblocking mode
activated Transm. Transm. Command output in the remote station
2)
Input uncoded coded tunbl>0
all off fg fg ---
BI1 f1 fs+f4 CO1
BI2 f2 fs+f5 CO2
BI3 f3 fs+f6 CO3
BI1 + BI2 or BI1 + f4 fs+f7 CO1+CO2+CO3
BI3 or BI2 + BI3
or BI1+BI2+BI3
2)
--- --- --- Alarm signaling +Unblocking pulse at CO4
BI4 1) fg fg ---
Usynch fs f1+f4 ---
1) In AMP operation (PLC connection) signal S6 is also activated (“Energized“) through BI4=on and voice transmission is
interrupted.
2) if an invalid frequency or code is received resp. in case of guard tone alarm: If tunbl>0 output of the unblocking pulse
(tunbl. = Duration of the unblocking pulse)

Page - 26 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Mode3 (four commands with priority)

For this mode no coded tripping is available!


In Mode3 the command information is transmitted alternately if more than one of the command
inputs BI1...4 are active. The signal inputs also have different priorities (BI1=Prio1, BI2=Prio2,
BI3=Prio3, BI4=Prio4) i.e.: if several signal inputs are active the sequence in which the commands
are sent is determined by the priority control.
Table 16: Logic scheme for the Mode3 (Switching functions)
activated Transm. Command output in the remote station
1)
Input uncoded tunbl>0
all off fg ---
BI1 f1 CO1
BI2 f2 CO2
BI3 f3 CO3
BI4 f4 CO4
BI1 a/o BI2 f1 a/o f2 a/o CO1 a/o CO2 a/o CO3 a/o CO4 alternating, see 2)
a/o BI3 a/o f3 a/o f4
BI4 alternating
--- --- Alarm signaling +Unblocking pulse at EALR
Usynch fs ---
1) if an invalid frequency or code is received resp. in case of guard tone alarm: If tunbl>0 output of the unblocking pulse
(tunbl. = Duration of the unblocking pulse). The unblocking pulse is distributed via the EALR output of the PU3f.
2) If more than one input is active command transmission is alternating. The sequence in which the command frequencies
are transmitted is dictated by the CO3 priority control. Setting the output extension to >=100ms on the receive side prevents
the output relays releasing during alternating command transmission.

Mode 3a (four independent commands 4iC)

This mode is always transmitted in the coded tripping function!


Table 17: Logic scheme for the Mode3a (4iC four independent commands)
activated Transm. Command output in the remote station
Input coded tunbl>0 1)
all off fg ---
BI1 fs+f4 CO1
BI2 f1+f4 CO2
BI3 f2+f4 CO3
BI4 f3+f4 CO4
BI1 + BI2 fs+f5 CO1 + CO2
BI1 + BI3 f2+f5 CO1 + CO3
BI1 + BI4 fs+f6 CO1 + CO4
BI2 + BI3 f1+f5 CO2 + CO3
BI2 + BI4 f3+f5 CO2 + CO4
BI3 + BI4 f2+f6 CO3 + CO4
BI1 + BI2 + BI3 f1+f6 CO1 + CO2 + CO3
BI1 + BI2 + BI4 f3+f6 CO1 + CO2 + CO4
BI1 + BI3 + BI4 fs+f7 CO1 + CO3 + CO4
BI2 + BI3 + BI4 f1+f7 CO2 + CO3 + CO4
BI1 + BI2 + BI3 + BI4 f2+f7 CO1 + CO2 + CO3 + CO4
Usynch f3+f7 ---
-- -- Alarm signaling +Unblocking pulse at EALR 2)
1) If output allocation 1:1 is adjusted
2) If an invalid frequency or code is received resp. in case of guard tone alarm: If tunbl>0 output of the unblocking pulse
(tunbl. = Duration of the unblocking pulse). The unblocking pulse is emitted via the EALR output of the PU3f.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 27


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Mode 3b (2plus2)

The commands 1 and 2 are always uncoded transmitted. The commands 3 and 4 as well as com-
binations from commands 3 and 4 with 1 and 2 are always coded transmitted.
Table 18: Logic scheme for the Mode3b (2plus2)
1)
activated Transm. Transm. Command output in the remote station
Input uncoded coded tunbl>0 2)
all off fg ---
BI1 f1 CO1
BI2 f2 CO2
BI1 + BI2 f3 CO1 + CO2

BI3 fs+f4 CO3


BI4 fs+f5 CO4
BI3 + BI4 fs+f6 CO3 + CO4

BI1 + BI3 f1+f4 CO1 + CO3


BI1 + BI4 f1+f5 CO1 + CO4
BI1 + BI3 + BI4 f1+f6 CO1 + CO3 + CO4
BI1 + BI2 + BI3 f1+f7 CO1 + CO2 + CO3
BI2 + BI3 f2+f4 CO2 + CO3
BI2 + BI4 f2+f5 CO2 + CO4
BI2 + BI3 + BI4 f2+f6 CO2 + CO3 + CO4
BI1 + BI2 + BI4 f3+f4 CO1 + CO2 + CO4
BI1 + BI2 + BI3 + BI4 f3+f5 CO1 + CO2 + CO3 + CO4
Usynch fs+f7 ---
1) If output allocation 1:1 is adjusted
2) If an invalid frequency or code is received resp. in case of guard tone alarm: If tunbl>0 output of the unblocking pulse
(tunbl. = Duration of the unblocking pulse). The unblocking pulse is distributed via the EALR output of the PU3f.

Mode4 (only one commands active)


Table 19: Logic scheme for the Mode4
activated Transm. Transm. Command output in the remote station
2)
Input uncoded coded tunbl>0
all off fg fg ---
BI1 f1 fs+f4 CO1
BI2 f2 f1+f4 CO2
BI3 f3 f2+f4 CO3
BI4 f4 f3+f4 CO4
more than 1 fg 1) fg ---
input activated
--- --- --- Alarm signaling +Unblocking pulse at RXALR
USYNC fs fs+f5 ---
1) Input error. If more than one input is activated fg is transmitted.
2) If an invalid frequency or code is received, resp. in case of guard tone alarm: If tunbl>0 output of the unblocking pulse
(tunbl. = Duration of the unblocking pulse). The unblocking pulse is distributed via the EALR output of the PU3f.

Page - 28 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Explanation:
The PU3f checks the state of input signals BI1...4 from the protection device for plausibility. Only
1 of the signal inputs BI1...3 may be active. If more than 1 of the signal inputs BI1...3 is active and
BI4 is inactive that is an input error (prohibited input combination).
BI4 has priority and is treated independently of the states of BI1...3; i.e. if BI4 is active the state
of BI1...3 is not significant (if BI4 is active the frequency tx_f4 is transmitted regardless of the state
of BI1...3).
The guard tone (fg) is transmitted in the case of an input error and an entry is generated in the
event memory with specification of the “prohibited input combination“.
The Unblocking function can be activated for Mode4 in the same way as with the other operating
modes.

Mode 5A “3 commands independent”

For this mode is no coded tripping available!


3 signal inputs are available for the operating mode “3 commands independent". 9 frequencies
are needed for transmitting “3-commands independent“ via the analog line interface LIA.
At the transmit end every possible combination of signal inputs BI1...3 is permanently assigned
to a protection frequency.
At the receive end every protection frequency can be assigned to one or more signal outputs
(CO1...4).
Table 20: Logic scheme for the Mode 5A (3iC three independent commands)
activated Transm. Command output in the remote station
Input uncoded tunbl>0 1)
all off fg ---
BI1 f1 CO1
BI2 f2 CO2
BI3 f3 CO3
BI1+BI2 f4 CO1+CO2
BI1+BI3 f5 CO1+CO3
BI2+BI3 f6 CO2+CO3
BI1+BI2+BI3 f7 CO1+CO2+CO3
USYNC fs ---
- - Alarm signaling +Unblocking pulse at EALR
1) If an invalid frequency or code is received, resp. in case of guard tone alarm: If tunbl>0 output of the unblocking pulse
(tunbl. = Duration of the unblocking pulse). The unblocking pulse is distributed via the EALR output of the PU3f.

Table 21: Possible output jumper settings in Mode 5A


Receive frequency CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 Explanation
fg X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 Guard tone signaling
f1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI1 active
f2 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI2 active
f3 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI3 active
f4 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI1+BI2 active
f5 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI1+BI3 active
f6 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI2+BI3 active
f7 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 BI1+BI2+BI3 active
Note: The default program settings are highlighted in bold type
Possible settings:
X = no reaction: The state of the signal output is not affected.
1 = switch on: The signal output is switched on or “retriggered“.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 29


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Mode 5D (only for digital line interfaces LID)

Operating mode 5D is designed exclusively for the digital lines interfaces LID-1 and/or LID-2. In
this mode 1...8 signal inputs and 1...8 signal outputs are available with two IFC modules. The sta-
tes of the signal inputs are transmitted to the distant station transparently and can be jumpered to
signal outputs there.
This operating mode was used in system SWT 2000 D.
Table 22: Possible output jumper settings in mode 5D
idx BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 CO6 CO7 CO8
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1
2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1
3 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1
4 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
255 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1
256 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1 X/1
Note: the states of the SYNC signals from LID-1 OR LID-2 can be programmed on CO1...8.
SYSWIN can administer up to 20 jumper settings
Possible settings:
X = no reaction: The state of the signal output is not affected.
1 = switch on: The signal output is switched on or “retriggered“.
The default program setting is 1:1 (“transparent“); i.e.: BI1=CO1, BI2=CO2, ... , BI8=CO8

Page - 30 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Frequency overview

Broadband devices in the VF range [kHz]


Table 23: Command frequencies of broadband devices

Command fre- VF1 VF2 VF3 VF4 VF5 VF1_M5A VF3_M5A


quency
Guard tone fg 2.615 2.615 3.810 3.810 3.810 2.615 3.810
Usynch fs 1.920 1.920 0.444 2.000 0.665 0.365 0.444
f1 1.700 1.700 2.000 0.665 2.000 1.920 2.000
f2 1.475 1.475 1.555 1.555 1.555 1.700 1.780
f3 0.810 --- 0.665 --- --- 1.475 1.555
f4 1.030 1.030 1.110 1.110 1.110 1.250 1.335
f5 --- --- --- --- --- 1.030 1.110
f6 --- --- --- --- --- 0.810 0.890
f7 --- --- --- --- --- 0.585 0.665
*) Frequency fs is used for clock synchronization (master-slave) between two SWT 3000 units
(if parameters are set) and is transmitted from the master to the slave unit once a day at 24:00h.

Table 24: Coded tripping variants in the VF range

Command fre- VF1_CT VF3_CT


quency
Guard tone fg 2.615 3.810
Usynch fs 1.920 2.000
f1 1.700 1.780
f2 1.475 1.555
f3 1.250 1.335
f4 1.030 1.110
f5 0.810 0.890
f6 0.585 0.665
f7 0.365 0.444

Narrow band devices in the VF range [kHz]


Table 25: Command frequencies of narrow band devices

Command frequency NB Ch1 NB Ch2 NB Ch3 NB Ch4


Guard tone fg 1.263 2.274 3.284 3.789
Usynch fs 1.137 2.147 3.158 3.663
f1 1.011 2.021 3.032 3.537
f2 0.884 1.895 2.905 3.411
f3 0.758 1.768 2.779 3.284
f4 0.632 1.642 2.653 3.158
*) Frequency fs is used for clock synchronization (master-slave) between two SWT 3000 units
(if parameters are set) and is transmitted from the master to the slave unit once a day at 24:00h.

The following parameters can be set for narrow band devices for two-wire operation:
Table 26: Narrow band versions for VF 2-wire connections
Variant NB Ch12: Transmit channel 1 Receive channel 2
Variant NB Ch21: Transmit channel 2 Receive channel 1
Variant NB Ch13: Transmit channel 1 Receive channel 3
Variant NB Ch31 Transmit channel 3 Receive channel 1
Variant NB Ch23 Transmit channel 2 Receive channel 3
Variant NB Ch32 Transmit channel 3 Receive channel 2

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 31


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Frequency diagram for broadband and narrow band devices:

f3 f4 f2 f1 fs fg
VF1
Mode 1 - 4
0,81 1,03 1,48 1,70 1,92 2,61

f4 f2 f1 fs fg
VF2
Mode 1
1,03 1,48 1,70 1,92 2,61

fs f3 f4 f2 f1 fg
VF3

Mode 1 - 4
0,44 0,67 1,11 1,56 2,00 3,81

f1 f4 f2 fs fg
VF4
Mode 1
0,67 1,11 1,56 2,00 3,81

fs f4 f2 f1 fg
VF5
Mode 1
0,67 1,11 1,56 2,00 3,81
VF1_M5A
fs f7 f6 f5 f4 f3 f2 f1 fg

Mode 5A
0,365 0,58 0,81 1,03 1,25 1,475 1,70 1,92 2,61

VF3_M5A fs f7 f6 f5 f4 f3 f2 f1 fg

Mode 5A
0,44 0,67 0,89 1,11 1,34 1,56 1,78 2,00 3,81

f7 f6 f5 f4 f3 f2 f1 fs fg
VF1_CT
0,365 0,58 0,81 1,03 1,25 1,475 1,70 1,92 2,61
f7 f6 f5 f4 f3 f2 f1 fs fg
VF3_CT

0,44 0,67 0,89 1,11 1,34 1,56 1,78 2,00 3,81

NB Ch1 - 3 NB Ch1 NB Ch2 NB Ch3


Mode 1 - 4
0,63 1,26 1,64 2,27 2,65 3,28

NB Ch4 NB Ch4
Mode 1 - 4
3,16 3,79
fg Guard tone Mode 1-5 Operating modes 1 - 4
fs Clock synchronization NB Ch1-4 Narrow band channels 1-4
M5A Operating Mode M5A
VFx_CT Frequencies for coded tripping used for operating Mode 1, 2, 3a, 3b, 4
Mode 1, 2 or 4 can be transmitted coded or non coded

Figure 13: Frequency diagram for broadband and narrow band devices

Page - 32 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Command duration for single purpose operation

Double system protection

In the double system protection operating mode a signal applied to the device input is transmitted
as long as the input circuit is activated. If another input signal is received while one is still applied
the transmit signal is shifted to the frequency corresponding to this input combination. The signal
output can be interrupted at the receiver output (optionally) after 500ms.
If the output relay is to be activated for a minimum time on reception of a command an increase in
the command output time can be set in steps of 5ms up to max. 2000ms.

Single-phase protection resp. operating mode 4 and M5A

Identical to double system protection

Switching functions Mode 3

In this mode any command applied at the device input is transmitted for 20ms (or the time set in
time slot). The next command (if there is one) is then transmitted or the same command again (if
no other input is activated) depending on the priority. The command output can be extended (op-
tionally) at the receiver output in steps of 100ms to max. 2000ms so that the output relays do not
drop out in between. This makes it possible to transmit commands from all input combinations de-
pending on priority.

Mode 3a, 3b resp. 5A

Identical to double system protection

Command duration for alternate multi purpose operation

From PowerSys release ≥P3_2_217 the command duration for the integrated SWT 3000 is auto-
matically adjusted to a limit of 1000ms.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 33


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Remote Monitoring (RM) and Service Channel (SC)

RM with analog interface

The Remote Monitoring function (RM) offers the option of accessing equipment data at the
SWT 3000 and PowerLink units via a serial interface with the service PC. With RM it is possible to
transmit equipment data between the terminals of one or more transmission routes. Transmission
is possible in both directions.

Station 1 Station 2

Master Slave
SWT 3000 SWT 3000
SSF SSB SSF Adr.2 SSB
Adr.1

SSF Front interface on the PU3


SSB Back interface

Figure 14: RM communication between units for an SWT 3000 connection

The event memory of the unit can, for example, be read out at station 2 with a service PC in sta-
tion 1 by means of RM.
For this purpose the units are assigned an RM address. A master - slave connection must also be
configured.
RM communication over several transmission routes is also possible by connecting two units via
the back RM interface (SSB).
Station 1 Station 2 Station 3....

SWT 3000 SWT 3000 SWT 3000 SWT 3000


Adr.1 Adr.2 Adr.3 Adr.4
SSB

SSB

SSB

SSF Front interface on the PU3


SSB Back interface

Figure 15: Communication over two SWT 3000 connection routes

Page - 34 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

RM signaling can only be transmitted at 50Bd via the analog interface. In this case the guard tone
frequency is used for transmitting the RM data. The following points must therefore be observed:
 RM only works when the guard tone is transmitted.
 Every command tone interrupts the RM transmission
 RM operation is not possible with continuous signaling

RM with digital interface

RM signals can be transmitted via digital interfaces LID-1 and LID-2 at 50Bd or 300 Bd.
With all-digital operation RM signaling is at 300 Bd. In mixed analog/digital operation transmission
is at 50Bd.

Service channel (SC)

The service channel (SC) is a transparent data channel (format 9600 bit/s, 8 data bits, 1 start bit,
1 stop bit, no parity) that is only available when using a digital line interface (LID-1 and/or LID-2). It
is available to the user as an asynchronous serial RS232 interface. The SC is electrically con-
nected via the PU3 line connector*). Transmission is always carried out via the active digital line in-
terface.

Figure 16: Configuration of remote access via LAN

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 35


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

The figure above shows the stations A and B which are connected to the office via the intranet.
The SWT3000 units in these stations can be reached via the intranet with the service PC and the
PowerSys program using the corresponding TCP/IP address for the remote access server (RAS)
which is connected to the remote access interface (SSR) on the backplane.
The SWT 3000 unit in station C can be accessed over the SC connection via intranet in station B.
In this case the service channel in station C must be connected to the remote access (resp. SSB)
interface.
It is basically possible to have full access to the system via the SSB interface. For this the configu-
ration of the interface must be adjusted to “Slave” in the service program “PowerSys”.

Station D Station C Station E

SWT3000 LID SWT3000 SWT3000 LID SWT3000

SSF SSB SSR SC SSF SSB SSR SC SSF SSB SSR SC SSF SSB SSR SC

RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232


RS232 RS232

SWT3000
LAN
RAS Router
SSF SSB SSR SC

RS232 RS232

LID
Station B

SWT3000

SSF SSB SSR SC


Station A RS232
Router
RS232
LAN

SWT3000 LID SWT3000


RAS
SSF SSB SSR SC SSF SSB SSR SC
RS232 RS232
RS232
RS232
RAS Router

LAN

SSB Rear interface RAS Remote Access Server


SSF Front interface SC Service Channel
SSR Remote access interface

Figure 17: Configuration of a complex network connection

Page - 36 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

The IP network – your gateway to SWT 3000


The SWT 3000 takes advantage of the latest technology to simplify operation and improve reliabil-
ity. Using standard TCP/IP network protocols, administrators can easily access each SWT 3000
device from anywhere inside your organization’s intranet. Access is also available remotely using a
modem. The system can interface with your own network security system and firewall, providing
you with the exact level of security your company requires. With easy authorized access to the
SWT 3000 from just about anywhere, users can now:
Perform remote maintenance operations
Read the event recorder from any location
Monitor the network in real time with SNMP

Figure 18: SWT 3000 Integration in a Network Management System

Our Windows-based PowerSys software is both intuitive and easy to learn, running on all stan-
dard computers. Power utilities increasingly rely on the real-time, comprehensive management ca-
pabilities of their networks to ensure optimum performance and data communication. Based on the
SNMP standard (Simple Network Management Protocol), Siemens Teleprotection devices can be
smoothly integrated to replace proprietary solutions or unmanaged components.
A selection of device data is available for SNMP network management administration:
Inventory management (hardware data, configuration data)
Performance management (event recorder)
Configuration management (reset command)
Alarm management (local alarms)

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 37


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Power supply

Stand-alone unit

One or alternatively two power supplies can be used in the SWT 3000 system. They are decoup-
led via diodes on the rear PC board. The output voltages from SV-1 and SV-2 are monitored by the
PU3 module in order to detect failure of a power supply.
The interface modules IFC are supplied via the PU3.

If two power supplies are used the SWT 3000 sub rack can only be
equipped with one unit.

Monitoring loop The presence of the PU3 and CLE modules is monitored by an Inhibit
loop. If the PU3 and/or CLE is pulled, this interrupts the monitoring loop
and the secondary voltages from SV-1 and SV-2 (if present) are discon-
nected.

BPSWT 3000

PU3e CLE/FOM1 FOM2


c21
SV2
a21 c21 a21 c21 a21
GND

SV
X41 X42

1 2 3 1 2 3
GND GND SV1

Figure 19: Inhibit loop for the power supply(ies)

An On/Off switch (SV) on the PU3 (not accessible from outside) also in-
terrupts this monitoring loop.
If only the CLE resp FOM1 module is not used the jumper X41 must be
inserted in position 1-2.
If the FOM2 is not used the jumper X42 must be in position 1-2.

Integrated unit

If the SWT 3000 is used in the PowerLink (iSWT) system the PU3 unit is supplied via the central
power supply of the PowerLink. The IFC modules are supplied via the PU3 again.

Page - 38 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Index:

Frequency diagram 32
Frequency overview 31
2

2plus2 19, 23, 28 I


2-wire cable connections 15
Inhibit 38
Intertripping 6
4

4iC 22, 27 L
4-wire connections 13
LIA 7
LID 6
A

Alternate multi-purpose operation 12 M


Applications
analog and digital 6 Mode 5D 25, 30
digital 6 Mode of operation
analog 10
digital 11
C Mode5A 24, 29
Monitoring 18
Command duration 33 Guard tone failure alarm 18
AMP 33 Operating voltage 18
Double system protection 33 Transmit level 18
Single-phase protection 33 Multipath transmission 7
Switching functions 33 Multi-purpose operation 12
CT 10

N
D
Narrow band devices
Description of function 4 Applications 14
Direct tripping 6
DLE 6
Double system protection 21, 26 O
Double system protection 19
DSP 11 only one command active 23, 28
Operating mode 5A 19
Operating mode 5D 19
E Operating modes with PLC equipment 11
Operating state 18
Equipment versions 13
broadband 13
narrow band 14 P
Event memory 11
PLC equipment 11
Power supply 38
F Protection modes 19
Protective operating modes 19
F6 Modulation 10
Features 11
FOM 8 R
connection to Mux 9
connection to PowerLink 8 Remote Maintenance 11
direct connection 10 RM 11, 34
four commands with priority 19, 22, 27 with analog interface 34
four independent commands 19 with digital interface 35

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 39


Functional Description SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

S Transfer tripping 6
Transmission path 16
SC 11, 34 analog 16
Service Channel 11 analog and digital 17
Service channel (SC) 35 digital 16
Single purpose operation 12 via PLC 17
Single-phase protection 21, 26 Transmission paths 7
Single-phase protection 19 tripping codes 20
SNMP 37 Two-wire operation 31
Switching functions 6
U
T
unblocking 20
Time slot 33

Page - 40 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Functional Description

Appendix:

List of figures

Figure 1: SWT 3000 device with analog interface ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4


Figure 2: Connection of the SWT 3000 via fibre optic cable to the PowerLink------------------------------------------- 8
Figure 3: Connection of the SWT 3000 via optical fibre to a FO Box.----------------------------------------------------- 9
Figure 4: Optical fibre connection SWT 3000 – SWT 3000 ----------------------------------------------------------------10
Figure 5: SWT 3000 four-wire connection via VF cable--------------------------------------------------------------------13
Figure 6: Parallel connection of several SWT 3000 units at one connection --------------------------------------------14
Figure 7: Example of a 2-wire connection with narrow band versions ---------------------------------------------------15
Figure 8: Examples using analog transmission path ------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Figure 9: Examples using digital transmission path-------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Figure 10: Examples for using analog and digital transmission path ------------------------------------------------------17
Figure 11: Examples of integrated SWT 3000 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------17
Figure 12: Principle of the unblocking mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------20
Figure 13: Frequency diagram for broadband and narrow band devices -------------------------------------------------32
Figure 14: RM communication between units for an SWT 3000 connection-----------------------------------------------34
Figure 15: Communication over two SWT 3000 connection routes---------------------------------------------------------34
Figure 16: Configuration of remote access via LAN--------------------------------------------------------------------------35
Figure 17: Configuration of a complex network connection -----------------------------------------------------------------36
Figure 18: SWT 3000 Integration in a Network Management System -----------------------------------------------------37
Figure 19: Inhibit loop for the power supply(ies) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------38

List of tables

Table 1: Features at a glance ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5


Table 2: Possible applications of the SWT 3000-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Table 3: Narrow band variants for VF 2-wire connections ------------------------------------------------------------------15
Table 4: Possible frequency combinations for the coded tripping commands ---------------------------------------------20
Table 5: Logic scheme for the Mode1 (Double system protection)----------------------------------------------------------21
Table 6: Logic scheme for the Mode2 (Single-phase protection)------------------------------------------------------------21
Table 7: Logic scheme for the Mode3 (Switching functions)-----------------------------------------------------------------22
Table 8: Logic scheme for the Mode3a (4iC four independent commands) ------------------------------------------------22
Table 9: Logic scheme for the Mode3b (2plus2)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------23
Table 10: Logic scheme for the Mode4 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------23
Table 11: Logic scheme for the Mode 5A (3iC three independent commands)-------------------------------------------24
Table 12: Possible output jumper settings in Mode 5A----------------------------------------------------------------------24
Table 13: Possible output jumper settings in mode 5D----------------------------------------------------------------------25
Table 14: Logic scheme for the Mode1 (Double system protection) with unblocking mode----------------------------26
Table 15: Logic scheme for the Mode2 (Single-phase protection) with unblocking mode------------------------------26
Table 16: Logic scheme for the Mode3 (Switching functions)--------------------------------------------------------------27
Table 17: Logic scheme for the Mode3a (4iC four independent commands) ---------------------------------------------27
Table 18: Logic scheme for the Mode3b (2plus2)----------------------------------------------------------------------------28
Table 19: Logic scheme for the Mode4 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------28
Table 20: Logic scheme for the Mode 5A (3iC three independent commands)-------------------------------------------29
Table 21: Possible output jumper settings in Mode 5A----------------------------------------------------------------------29
Table 22: Possible output jumper settings in mode 5D----------------------------------------------------------------------30
Table 23: Command frequencies of broadband devices---------------------------------------------------------------------31
Table 24: Coded tripping variants in the VF range--------------------------------------------------------------------------31
Table 25: Command frequencies of narrow band devices ------------------------------------------------------------------31
Table 26: Narrow band versions for VF 2-wire connections ---------------------------------------------------------------31

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 41


Equipment Manual SWT 3000

Chapter 2: Installation and Commissioning

Installation 6

Connecting the device 8

Jumper settings 20

Commissioning 31

Settings on the device 33

New configuration 46

Alarms 61
Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Contents:

General safety regulations -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4


Transport and storage------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Installation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Equipment manual ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Installation procedure------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Cabling and equipment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Grounding----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Connecting the device without FOM modules -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Connecting plugs------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
Equipment of the sub rack without FOM slots -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Equipment of the IFC slots ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
Connecting the device with FOM modules -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Connecting plugs-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Equipment of the sub rack with FOM slots -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Pin assignments of the SWT 3000 modules: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Pin assignment of the IFC-x module ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Pin assignment of the PU3f module: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Signals of the line interface analog (LIA)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14
Connection of the digital line interfaces --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14
Signals for the LID-1 (Line Interface Digital 1) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------15
Signals for LID-2 (Line Interface Digital 2)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Service channel interface SC ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Remote access interface SSR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Remote Monitoring (RM) interface SSB--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17
Pin assignment of the CLE module --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17
Pin assignment of the ALRS module ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18
Pin assignment of the ALR module--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19
Jumper settings for the SWT 3000 modules:---------------------------------------------------------------------------------20
Jumper settings for the IFC modules ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------20
Jumper settings for the PU3f module------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21
Links for selecting the line interfaces LID-1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------22
Links for the selection of line interfaces LID-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------22
Selection of the input gain for the G703.6 interfaces------------------------------------------------------------------------22
DLE settings for the LID-x connection via FOM -------------------------------------------------------------------------22
Jumper settings for the CLE module ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------23
Jumper settings for the FOM module------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------24
The FOBox------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------25
Interfaces of the FOBox ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------25
Power supply of the FOBox -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------26
Alarm relay contacts of the FOBox-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------26
Signification of the LED -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------26
Jumper settings of the FOB --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------27
ALR Module----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------28
Visual Indication --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------28
Test switch S1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------28
Jumper settings for the ALRS module ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------29
ALR jumper settings-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------30
Commissioning ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------31
Switching on the power supply-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------31
Switching on the device ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------31
Connecting the service PC ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------31
PC requirements---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------31
PC Connecting cable----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------32

Page - 2 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Settings on the device -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------33


Setting of the SWT 3000 transmit level ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------33
Operation with the PLC system PowerLink ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------34
Connection via a VFx module : ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------34
Connection of an external SWT 3000 to the PowerLink50/100 --------------------------------------------------------35
Connection via a FOM module : -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------36
PU3f integrated in the PowerLink:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------38
Connection of two SWT 3000 via FOM --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------39
System configuration ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------39
Connection of the SWT 3000 via FOM to a multiplexer -------------------------------------------------------------------40
System configuration ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------40
Receive level for analog interfaces:--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------41
Setting parameters of measuring points ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------42
Time/date--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------43
Clock synchronisation -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------43
Line clock synchronisation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------45
SWT 3000 new configuration----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------46
Configuration ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------46
System configuration ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------47
Selecting the operating mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------48
Selecting the connection interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------48
SWT 3000 <System-2 Configuration> ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------49
Interfaces -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------49
Power supply ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------49
Test mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------49
Application---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------50
Output allocation -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------50
SWT 3000 <RM> configuration: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------51
Setting options for the SWT 3000 <Timer> configuration -----------------------------------------------------------------52
Configuration of the command input resp. output ------------------------------------------------------------------------53
Timer settings for the command output ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------56
Setting recommendations for the SWT 3000 timer configuration ---------------------------------------------------------58
Broadband versions -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------58
Narrow band versions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------60
Programming the device --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------60
SWT 3000 Alarms -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------61
Alarm output via the ALRS or ALR module ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------61
Alarms on the CLE --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------61
Possible reasons for the alarms ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------62
Special features for the output of the unblocking impulse ------------------------------------------------------------------63
Stand alone equipment:-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------63
SWT 3000 integrated in the ESB 2000i ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------63
SWT 3000 integrated in the PowerLink system---------------------------------------------------------------------------63
Setting options for the SWT 3000 <Alarms>------------------------------------------------------------------------------64
Configuration of the alarm output RXALR in the PowerLink -------------------------------------------------------------65
Alarm messages in the service program PowerSys --------------------------------------------------------------------------65
Index:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------66
Appendix: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------68
List of figures: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------68
List of tables: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------70

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 3


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

General safety regulations


This manual does not represent a complete list of all safety measures re-
quired for the operation of equipment (module, device) because addi-
tional measures may be necessary under specific operating conditions. It
does, however, contain instructions that you must observe for your per-
sonal safety and for avoiding damage to equipment. These instructions
are highlighted by a warning triangle as shown below according to the
degree of danger.

!
Danger
signifies that death, serious physical injury or substantial material dam-
age will occur if appropriate precautionary measures are not taken.
Warning

! signifies that death, serious physical injury or substantial material dam-


age may occur if appropriate precautionary measures are not taken.
Caution
signifies that minor physical injury or material damage may occur if ap-
propriate precautionary measures are not taken.
Qualified personnel Start-up and operation of equipment described in this manual (module,
device) may only be carried out by qualified personnel. For the purpose
of this instruction and product labels, a qualified person is one who is fa-
miliar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment
and the hazards involved. In addition, he has the following qualifications:
> Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and
tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety prac-
tices.
> Is trained in the proper care and use of PowerLine equipment in accor-
dance with established safety practices.
> Is trained in rendering first aid.
Please note the following:
The equipment must only be used for the applications described in the

! catalogue and the technical description and only in conjunction with third
party devices and components recommended or approved by Siemens.
Perfect and reliable operation of the product is conditional upon proper
transport, storage, installation and assembly as well as correct operation
and proper maintenance.
When operating electrical equipment certain components inevitably carry
a dangerous voltage. Serious physical injury or material damage can oc-
cur if the equipment is not handled properly:
z Equipment must be grounded before any connections are wired up.
z Dangerous voltages can be present in all circuit sections connected to
the power supply.
z Even after the power supply has been disconnected there may still be
dangerous voltages present in the equipment (charge stored on a capaci-
tor).
z Equipment with current transformer circuits must not be operated in the
open state.
z The limits specified in this product document must not be exceeded; this
must also be taken into account in testing and on start-up.

Page - 4 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

!
Warning!
The equipment may be supplied by different and from each other inde-
pendent dangerous voltages. Before opening the equipment and starting
the maintenance work, the device must be isolated with the specified cir-
cuit breaker.

This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the member states re-
lating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive
89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified
voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 2006/95/EC).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to Article
10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN
61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 (for EMC Directive) and with the standard
EN 60950-1 (for Low-Voltage Directive) by Senton. The device is de-
signed and manufactured for application in industrial environment.
These devices are designed for use in the industrial sector and fulfil the following requirements:
Emitted interference: EN 61000-6-4: 2001
Immunity to interference: EN 61000-6-2: 2005
For use in residential areas you also need the individual authorization of a national authority or
test agency with respect to emitted interference.
The test and connection jacks accessible at the front are not isolated interfaces and are only used
for maintenance purposes. The usual ESD measures must be observed in use. This also applies
for the use of telephone connection sockets (if present).
All signal and data cables are shielded and connection of the shielding over a large area must be
provided at both ends.
IZIER
TIF TE
R
The products and systems listed here are manufactured and marketed
ZE

DIN ISO 9001


using a DQS-certified quality management system in accordance with
DIN ISO 9001 (Certificate Registration Number 000876 QM UM). The
DQS certificate is recognized in all EQ network countries (Reg. No.: 876)
M
QU

LIT
TE

YS
A

ÄT TS
SMA
NAGEMEN

Transport and storage

The limit values specified below must not be exceeded during transport and storage of PowerLink
devices and individual modules. They may only be transported in their unopened original packag-
ing.
If stored in their unopened original packaging there are no additional requirements for the storage
room apart from the values for temperature and humidity specified below. If stored unpacked or
partially unpacked please ensure that the devices and modules are stored in maintained, dry and
dust-free rooms.
permissible ambient temperature -40° to +70°C
relative humidity 5 to 95%

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 5


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Installation

CAUTION !
Electrostatic sensitive devices
Electrostatic sensitive devices are protected against destruction by electrostatic charge by means
of protective structures at the inputs and outputs. In unfavourable cases, however, plastic floor
coverings, non-conductive work surfaces, or clothing containing artificial fibres can result in such
high charges that electrostatic sensitive devices can be damaged or even destroyed despite
the protective networks mentioned. If a device is damaged its reliability decreases drastically, al-
though it may be a long time before the effects of the damage are noticeable.
In order to ensure that electrostatic charges are eliminated harmless when working on the system
you must observe the following points without fail:

1. Before carrying out any work on the 2. When working on modules always place
system ground yourself with a wrist strap. them on a grounded, conductive surface

3. Only transport modules in suitable pro-


tective bags.

The following points must also be observed during installation:

DANGER!

!
The device has to be installed in a locked room, with admission for com-
missioning personal only. It must be excluded that other persons except
the commissioning personal has access to this equipment.
ATTENTION!
Sufficient cooling has to be provided!

1. Before installing the device the ground- 2. Connect the grounding wire immediately
ing wire must first be laid and connected to after installing the device or setting up the
ground potential. cabinet.

3. Use shoe grounding strips.

Warning!
There is a risk of electrostatic discharge up until the grounding wire has
been connected even if you are wearing a wrist strap. If possible you
should therefore not touch modules and wiring before then.
When dismantling the system the grounding wire must not be discon-
nected until all work has been completed.

Page - 6 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Equipment manual

The equipment manual is written for service and operation personnel


in the high voltage power line environment. All existing safety instructions
in the client's environment have to be observed and only trained and
instructed personnel is authorized to work with the equipment.

Installation procedure

The main steps in the installation procedure are listed below:


z Transport device or cabinet to the installation room in its packaging
z Unpack and dispose of transport packaging
z Check delivery for completeness and for mechanical damage
z Secure cabinet to the floor or wall, or install device in cabinet or rack
z Connect grounding wire
z Connect power supply
z Cable data connections to the main distribution frame or the peripheral
devices
z Cable the alarm outputs

SWT 3000 devices can be supplied as standalone devices or installed in


a cabinet together with other system components. In case of delivery in
a cabinet the entire cabling of the individually installed devices is in-
stalled at the factory up to the connection terminals on the assembly
board. In this case the connection points for the cabling can be found
in the supplied cabinet documentation.

Cabling and equipment

Grounding

Caution!

The cross section of the grounding wire and the laying of the wire must
comply with the regulations applicable for the place of installation.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 7


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Connecting the device without FOM modules

! An easy accessible separator in the supply circuit with a contact distance


of min. 3mm must be available.

Connecting plugs
Table 1: Arrangement of the connecting plugs of the SWT 3000
Connecting plug Module Pin assignment
IFC-1 IFC D/P/S Page 12
IFC-2 IFC D/P Page 12
X4 PU3F Page 13
X3 CLE Page 17
X2 ALRS Page 18
X1 Power supply PS next Fig.

SV ALRS CLE PU3 IFC-1 IFC-2


X1 X2 X3 X4

C1 C1
SSB 1 3 1 3
A1 A1 C1 A1
2

2 4 2 4
8
1 3 1 3

11

14
2 4 2 4
17
1 3 1 3
X41
20

23 * SSR
2 4 2 4
26
1 3 1 3

N(+) 29

L1(-) 32
C32 A32 C32 A32 C32 A32 2 4 2 4

SC

* loop position / Modul ausblenden

Figure 1: View of a SWT 3000 backplane without FOM slots

The power supply cables have to be tied additional immediately at the


terminals.
Please follow the performance details on the back plane

Page - 8 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Equipment of the sub rack without FOM slots

A maximum of two SWT 3000 devices can be installed in an ES902 sub rack. These devices form
two separately operating systems each with its own power supply.

SIEMENS > SIEMENS >

SWT 3000 > SWT 3000 >

LID2 LID1 SAL LID2 LID1 SAL

OK LIA EAL OK LIA EAL

S/N S/N

IFC_2 IFC_1 PU3_1 CLE_1 ALRS_1 SV_1 IFC_4 IFC_3 PU3_2 CLE_2 ALRS_2 SV_2

System 1 System 2

IFC_1 Slot 1 IFC-x in device 1 IFC_3 Slot 1 IFC-x in device 2


IFC_2 Slot 2 IFC-x in device 1 IFC_4 Slot 2 IFC-x in device 2
PU3f_1 Processor module, device 1 PU3f_2 Processor module, device 2
CLE_1 Copper line equipment, device 1 CLE_2 Copper line equipment, device 2
(only with analog interface) (only with analog interface)
ALRS_1 Alarm module, device 1 ALRS_2 Alarm module, device 2
SV_1 Power supply, device 1 SV_2 Power supply, device 2

Figure 2: Equipment of the sub rack with two SWT 3000 systems

Equipment of the IFC slots

IFC_1and IFC_3 Slots IFC_1 (in device 1) and IFC_3 (in device 2) must be equipped with
an interface module IFC-D (direct tripping) or IFC-P (permissive tripping).
The commands to be transmitted by the protective relay are also con-
nected here (binary inputs 1-4). Output of the received commands to the
protective relay is also via these modules.
IFC_2 and IFC_4 An additional slot IFC_2 (in device 1) and IFC_4 (in device 2) is available
in every device for an IFC module. This can be equipped with types
IFC-D , IFC-P or IFC-S (signaling).
If this slot is equipped with an IFC-D or IFC-P the output relays of these
modules are used for doubling the contacts. The inputs are not used. If it
is equipped with an IFC-S module this is used for signaling commands
that are entered (binary inputs) or output (relay outputs) by modules
IFC-D or IFC-P at slot 2.
Table 2: Equipment options for slots IFC_1 to IFC_4
Slot Equipment Application
IFC_1 IFC-D and IFC-P Device 1 command input/command output
IFC_2 IFC-D, IFC-P or IFC-S Device 1 doubling of command output contacts or
status messages slot IFC./1. Command in-
put/command output only with digital interfaces.
IFC_3 IFC-D and IFC-P Device 2 command input/command output
IFC_4 IFC-D, IFC-P or IFC-S Device 2 doubling of command output contacts or
status messages slot IFC./3. Command in-
put/command output only with digital interfaces.

The terminal assignment of the modules is shown in Figure 5.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 9


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Connecting the device with FOM modules

Connecting plugs
Table 3: Arrangement of the connecting plugs of the SWT 3000
Connecting plug Module Pin assignment
IFC-1 IFC D/P/S Page 12
IFC-2 IFC D/P Page 12
X4 PU3f Page 13
X3 CLE / FOM-1 Page 17
X6 FOM-2
X2 ALRS Page 18
X1 Power supply PS next Fig.

SV ALRS FOM2 CLE/FOM1 PU3 IFC-1 IFC-2


X1 X2 X6 X3 X4

C1 C1
SSB 1 3 1 3
A1 A1 C1 A1
2

2 4 2 4
8
1 3 1 3

11

14
2 4 2 4
17
1 3 1 3
X42 X41
20 3 3
2 2
23 *1 * 1
2 4 2 4
26 SSR 1 3 1 3

N(+) 29

L1(-) 32
C32 A32 C32 A32 C32 A32 2 4 2 4

SC

* loop position / Modul ausblenden

SSB RM connector
SSR remote access connector
SC service channel connector

Figure 3: View of a SWT 3000 backplane with FOM slots

The power supply cables have to be tied additional immediately at the


terminals.
Please follow the performance details on the back plane

Page - 10 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Equipment of the sub rack with FOM slots

Due to the wider backplane only one SWT 3000 device can be installed in an ES902 sub rack.

SIEMENS >

SWT 3000 >

LID2 LID1 SAL

OK LIA EAL

S/N

IFC_2 IFC_1 PU3 CLE/ FOM-2 ALRS SV


FOM-1

IFC_1 Slot 1 for the interface module IFC_x


IFC_2 Slot 2 for the interface module IFC_x
PU3f Processor module
CLE Copper line equipment (only with analog interface)
FOM-1 Slot position for the first FOM module
FOM-2 Slot position for the second FOM module
ALRS Alarm module
SV Power supply

Figure 4: Equipment of the sub rack with a SWT 3000 system for using FOM modules

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 11


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Pin assignments of the SWT 3000 modules:

Pin assignment of the IFC-x module

The IFC interface modules must be connected from the protective relay to connector X1 (modular
terminal block) (cable cross section up to 1.5 mm2 ). MINIMUM two cables have to be tied immedi-
ately at the terminals.

IFC-D/P IFC-S

1 3
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 K5 K6 K8 K7

4A
2 4
1 3

3A CR

2 4
1 3

2A

2 4
1 3

1A
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 K9 K10 K11 K12
2 4
IFC-D Interface module for direct tripping BI1 -4 Binary inputs 1 to 4
IFC-P Interface module for permissive tripping CO1 - 4 Command outputs 1-4
IFC-S Interface module for signaling K5-8 Signaling of the binary inputs 1 to 4
CR Common root of relays K5 to K12 K9-12 Signaling of the command outputs

Figure 5: Contact assignment of the interface module IFC-x

The connection principle of the IFC-D/P binary inputs can be seen from the following diagram:
IFC-D/P BI 1
PR U = 24...250 V
F 3A1 X43 X44 X45

X55 *)

4A1

*) Setting of the nominal input voltage


PR Protection relay
BI 1 Binary input 1
F Fuse

Figure 6: Connection principle for the binary inputs of the IFC-D/P modules

Page - 12 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Pin assignment of the PU3f module:


Table 4: Pin assignment of the PU3f
Pin a b c
1 GNDS GNDS
2
3 GND GND
GND
4 P5_SV1 P5 P5_SV2
5
LID_25
6 P12_SV1 LID_26 P12_SV2
7
8
LID_11 LID_12
9 LID_13 LID_14
10 LID_15 LID_16
LID_27
11 LID_17 LID_18
12 LID_21 LID_22
LID_28
13
14 N12_SV2
LID_23 LID_24
15
16 N12_SV1 P5
17 P5
18 P12 N12
19
20 GND P12
21 INHIBIT INHIBIT
22 N12 GND GND
23 S6 control wire for AMP P12
24
LID_SC_TX
25
26
LID_SC_RX
27 GND
28
29
30
31 GNDS GNDS
32
P5_x Power supply (SV1, SV2) P12_x Power supply (SV1, SV2)
N12_x Power supply (SV1, SV2)
LID_x Digital line interface (X.21. G703.1 or G703.6)
LID_SC_x Digital line interface Service Channel

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 13


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Signals of the line interface analog (LIA)


Table 5: Pin assignment for interface LIA
Pin PU3f X1 Signal
b28 Input: F6 signal in IF1 range from HFE
b29 Reference potential for F6 signal IF1 range from HFE
a29 Output: F6 signal in IF1 range to the HFS
c30 Reference potential for F6 signal IF1 range to the HFS
b26 Output: F6 signal in VF range to the IF_transmission module
b27 Reference potential for F6 signal in VF range to the IF_ transmission module
b24 Input: F6 signal in VF range from the IF_receiver module
b25 Reference potential for F6 signal in VF range from the IF_receiver module
b23 Output: Control signal S6 for WZ operation to the IF_transmission module
a3, b3, c3, a20, Signal reference potential GND
b22, c22

Connection of the digital line interfaces

The signals at the digital interfaces are fed via a plug connector from the PU3f to the SUB-D
sockets X1 (LID-1) and X2 (LID-2).

LID-1
SV ALRS CLE PU3 IFC-1 IFC-2
X1 X2 X3 X4

C1 C1
SSB 1 3 1 3
A1 A1 C1 A1
2

2 4 2 4
8
1 3 1 3

11 X1

14
2 4 2 4
17
1 3 1 3
X41
20

23
SSR
X2 2 4 2 4
26
1 3 1 3

N(+) 29

L1(-) 32
C32 A32 C32 A32 C32 A32 2 4 2 4

SC

LID-2

Figure 7: Connection sockets X1 and X2 for the digital interfaces

Every wire pair in the connecting cables used for the digital interfaces
should be twisted and shielded.
Minimum requirements:
Every wire pair twisted and complete shielding for all wire pairs.

Page - 14 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

The socket assignment can be seen from the following tables.

Signals for the LID-1 (Line Interface Digital 1)

The signals for digital line interface 1 are fed from PU3f via the SUB-D plug X1 to the backplane
of the device. The pin assignment depends on the interface used.
Table 6: Pin assignments for interface LID-1
Terminal PU3f SUB-D plug X1 Module X.21 Module G703.1 Module G703.6
cable connector Pin Signal Signal Signal
LID_11 a8 4 X21_RxD_A1 DI11 DI11
LID_12 c8 11 X21_RxD_B1 DI12 DI12
LID_13 a9 2 X21_TxD_A1 DO11 DO11
LID_14 c9 9 X21_TxD_B1 DO12 DO12
LID_15 a10 6 X21_RxC_A1
LID_16 c10 13 X21_RxC_B1
LID_17 a11 7 X21_TxC_A1
LID_18 c11 14 X21_TxC_B1
GNDS /Shield a31 c31 1 GNDS / Shield GNDS GNDS
GND / Signal a3 c3 8 GND / Signal GND GND
Table 7: Signals for the X-21 interface for LID-1
Signal name Function
X21RDA1 Input: X.21 Receive data signal a
X21RDB1 Input: X.21 Receive data signal b
X21TDA1 Output: X.21 Transmit data signal a
X21TDB1 Output: X.21 Transmit data signal b
X21RCA1 Input: X.21 Receive clock signal a
X21RCB1 Input: X.21 Receive clock signal b
X21TCA1 Output: X.21 Transmit clock signal a
X21TCB1 Output: X.21 Transmit clock signal b
GNDS Shielding
GND Signal reference potential
Table 8: Signal for the G703.1 and G703.6- interface for LID-1
Signal name Function
DI11 Input: Data in signal 1
DI12 Input: Data in signal 2
DO11 Output: Data out signal 1
DO12 Output: Data out signal 2
GNDS Shielding
GND Signal reference potential

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 15


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Signals for LID-2 (Line Interface Digital 2)

The signals for digital line interface 2 are fed from the PU3f via the SUB-D plug X2 to the back-
plane of the device. The pin assignment depends on the interface used.
Table 9: Pin assignments for the LID-2
Terminal PU3f SUB-D plug X2 Module X.21 Module G703.1 Module G703.6
cable connector Pin Signal Signal Signal
LID_21 a12 4 X21_RxD_A2 DI21 DI21
LID_22 c12 11 X21_RxD_B2 DI22 DI22
LID_23 a14 2 X21_TxD_A2 DO21 DO21
LID_24 c14 9 X21_TxD_B2 DO22 DO22
LID_25 b5 6 X21_RxC_A2
LID_26 b6 13 X21_RxC_B2
LID_27 b10 7 X21_TxC_A2
LID_28 b12 14 X21_TxC_B2
GNDS /Shield a31 c31 1 GNDS / Shield GNDS GNDS
GND / Signal a3 c3 8 GND / Signal GND GND
Table 10: Signals for the X-21 interface for LID-2
Signal name Function
X21RDA2 Input: X.21 Receive data signal a
X21RDB2 Input: X.21 Receive data signal b
X21TDA2 Output: X.21 Transmit data signal a
X21TDB2 Output: X.21 Transmit data signal b
X21RCA2 Input: X.21 Receive clock signal a
X21RCB2 Input: X.21 Receive clock signal b
X21TCA2 Output: X.21 Transmit clock signal a
X21TCB2 Output: X.21 Transmit clock signal b
GNDS Shielding
GND Signal reference potential
Table 11: Signals for the G703.1 and G703.6 interface for LID-1
Signal name Function
DI21 Input: Data in signal 1
DI22 Input: Data in signal 2
DO21 Output: Data out signal 1
DO22 Output: Data out signal 2
GNDS Shielding
GND Signal reference potential

Service channel interface SC


Table 12: Signals for the service channel interface
Signal name SC connector Pin Function
LID_SC_RX 2 Output: Service channel receive data
LID_SC_TX 3 Input: Service channel transmit data
GND 5 Signal reference potential

Remote access interface SSR


Table 13: Pin assignment of the remote access interface SSR
Signal name SSR connector Pin Function
RxD 2 Receive data
TxD 3 Transmit data
GND 5 GND

Page - 16 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Remote Monitoring (RM) interface SSB

RM communication over several transmission routes is also possible by connecting two units via
the back RM interface (SSB) ref. also to chapter 1 system description.
Table 14: Pin assignment of the remote monitoring interface SSB
Signal name SSB connector Pin Function
RxD 2 Receive data
TxD 3 Transmit data
GND 5 GND

Pin assignment of the CLE module


Table 15: Pin assignment of the CLE
Pin a b c
1 Shield GNDS GNDS
2
3 Ground GND Control wire S6 (S6AB)
4
5 Control wire S6 (S6AB_GND)
6
7 Protection receive signal A
8
9 Protection receive signal B
10
11 Protection transmit signal A
12
13 Protection transmit signal B
14
15 DC value transmit signal
16 S/N Alarm DC value transmit signal GND P5V (+5V)
17 EAL Alarm P5V (+5V)
18 P12V (+12V) M12V (-12V)
19 SAL Alarm
20 GND12 P12V (+12V)
21 INHIBIT INHIBIT
22 M12V (-12V) GND12
23 Enable transmitter output S6 control line from PU3f
24 VF signal from PU3
25 VF signal from PU3 GND
26 VF signal to PU3
27 VF signal to PU3 GND Ground GND
28 S6 control wire from PU3
29
30
31 Shield GNDS Shield GNDS
32

Input and output signals for cable connection


Additionally for PLC alternate multi purpose operation

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 17


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Pin assignment of the ALRS module


Table 16: Pin assignment of the ALRS module
Pin a b c
1 USYNC Input a
2
3 USYNC Input b
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 GNDS GNDS GNDS
13 EALR from PU3f
14 USYNC to PU3f NDALR from PU3f
15 GENALR from PU3f
16 P5V (+5V) P5V (+5V) P5V (+5V)
17 GND GND GND
18 P12V (+12v) P12V (+12v) P12V (+12v)
19
20
21 EALR Output a
22
23 EALR Output b
24
25 NDALR Output b
26
27
28 NDALR Output a
29
30 GALR Output b
31
32 GALR Output a

Input and output signals


Table 17: Connection of the alarm relays
Alarm relay Designation Connection pin
K1 General alarm GALR a32, c30
K2 Pre- (Non-urgent) alarm NDALR a28, a25
K3 Receiver alarm EALR a21, c23

Page - 18 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Pin assignment of the ALR module


Table 18: Pin assignment of the ALR

PIN Signalname PIN Signalname PIN Signalname


A1 BI1_A B1 C1
A2 B2 C2
A3 B3 C3 BI1_B
A4 B4 C4
A5 BI2_A B5 C5
A6 B6 C6
A7 B7 C7
A8 BI2_B B8 C8
A9 B9 C9
A10 B10 C10
A11 B11 C11
A12 FGND B12 FGND C12 FGND
A13 B13 C13 ALA1_OUT_L
A14 BI1_IN_L B14 C14 ALA2_OUT_L
A15 BI2_IN_L B15 C15 ALA3_OUT_L
A16 P5V B16 P5V C16 P5V
A17 GND B17 GND C17 GND
A18 P12V B18 P12V C18 P12V
A19 B19 C19
A20 B20 C20
A21 ALA1_A B21 C21
A22 B22 C22
A23 B23 C23 ALA1_B
A24 B24 C24
A25 ALA2_B B25 C25
A26 B26 C26
A27 B27 C27
A28 ALA2_A B28 C28
A29 B29 C29
A30 B30 C30 ALA3_B
A31 B31 C31
A32 ALA3_A B32 C32

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 19


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Jumper settings for the SWT 3000 modules:

Jumper settings for the IFC modules

H10
Test operation 1 1
H1 H5
display X58
X54
H2 H6 Control logic X30
H3 H7 X53 BI 4
H4 H8 X40
X52
1
2
K16 K15 K14 K13 X57
3 S1 X51
4

K12 K11 K10 K9 X50 BI 3


K4 K3 K2 K1 X49
Operating LED
X56
H9 X48

X47 BI 2

X46
K5 K6 K7 K8
X41
X55
X45
X42
X44 BI 1
IFC-D: K1 . . . K4
IFC-P: K13 . . . K16 X43
IFC-S: K5 . . . K12

Figure 8: Position of jumpers X43 to X58

Table 19: Assignment of jumpers X43 to X58


Signal input 250V 110V 48/60V 24V
BI1 X55=inserted X55=open X55=open X55=open
X43=open X43=inserted X43=open X43=open
X44=open X44=open X44=inserted X44=open
X45=open X45=open X45=open X45=inserted
BI2 X56=inserted X56=open X56=open X56=open
X46=open X46=inserted X46=open X46=open
X47=open X47=open X47=inserted X47=open
X48=open X48=open X48=open X48=inserted
BI3 X57=inserted X57=open X57=open X57=open
X49=open X49=inserted X49=open X49=open
X50=open X50=open X50=inserted X50=open
X51=open X51=open X51=open X51=inserted
BI4 X58=inserted X58=open X58=open X58=open
X52=open X52=inserted X52=open X52=open
X53=open X53=open X53=inserted X53=open
X54=open X54=open X54=open X54=inserted
The second interface module is used in the case of an IFC-D/P module for doubling the output
contacts. The binary inputs are connected at only one module (in slot IFC-1).
In the case of module IFC-S jumpers X43- X58 are not provided because the binary inputs
are not existing. The module contains 8 signaling relays. For seven relays one changeover con-
tact is brought out in each case. The contact of relay K5 can be used as a make contact or a break
contact by means of jumper X42. All eight signaling contacts have a common root (3A1).
The jumper X30 serves for the switch over to the programming of the controller. In normal op-
eration the jumper must be in position 1-2. The connector X40 serves for the connection of the
programming device.

Page - 20 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Jumper settings for the PU3f module

1
1
X17 X3 34
X14 X13
X8
X15
S1
1 X16 Power ON / OFF
H1
H2
X1
Connection of the IFC Connection of the DLE
26 modules

X10

1
1 X7
26
X9 X6 1

Figure 9: Position of the jumpers on the PU3f module

Table 20: Function of the jumpers on the PU3f module


Jumper X16 Function Jumper X17 Function
1-2 Normal operation 1-2 Normal operation
2-3 Monitor operation 2-3 Programming with
Memtool
When using digital line interfaces links must be set on the DLE module. Module DLE is designed
as a self-contained PC board that is connected electrically to the PU3 via a ribbon cable and me-
chanically via spacer sleeves. All external interfaces are routed via the PU3f module.

X4 X11

X7
X5 X20
1
X6 X21
X42
1
X22
X46 1
X23
X9 1

X48
X49 X44 X43
X8
X47

X10
X52 X53 X3 X45

Figure 10: Position of the jumpers on the DLE module

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 21


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Links for selecting the line interfaces LID-1


Table 21: Selection of interfaces for the LID-1
Interface X48 X49 X42 X43 X6 X4 X5 X20 X21
X.21 Connection: 1-2 1-2 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 1-2 1-2
11-12 11-12
G703.1 Connection: 3-4 3-4 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3
13-14 13-14
G703.6 sym. Connection: 5-6 5-6 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3
15-16 15-16
G703.6 asym. Connection: 7-8 5-6 2-3 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
15-16 15-16

Links for the selection of line interfaces LID-2


Table 22: Interface selection for the LID-2
Interface X48 X49 X46 X44 X7 X8 X9 X22 X23
X.21 Connection: 19-20 19-20 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 1-2 1-2
29-30 29-30
G703.1 Connection: 21-22 21-22 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3
31-32 31-32
G703.6 sym. Connection: 23-24 23-24 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3
33-34 33-34
G703.6 asym. Connection: 25-26 23-24 2-3 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
33-34 33-34

Selection of the input gain for the G703.6 interfaces


Table 23: Selection of the input gain for the G703.6 interfaces

Input gain LID-1 LID-2


12 dB X53 / 2-3 X52 / 2-3
43 dB X53 / 1-2 X52 / 1-2

DLE settings for the LID-x connection via FOM

In case of connecting the LID-x via the FOM modules always the X.21
interface must be selected on the DLE module!

Page - 22 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Jumper settings for the CLE module

W4
X10 1 2 X12 X11
6 R9
N2
X9 1 2

V5
W3 T1
N4 W2 R7
W1
R8
H3 X2
1

V103

V102
W8
X15 X16
H2
N3
6

R136

R125

R124
H1
T2
D1

1
W6 W5
X5 X4 X3
N5

C100
K1
W7
X13 X14

Figure 11: Position of the jumpers on the CLE module

Table 24: Jumper setting for the input and output impedance
Setting 600 Ohm >5kOhm
Input impedance W4 without W4
Output impedance W5 W6, W7, W8
Table 25: Jumper setting for the receive signal gain
Receive signal gain [dB] Jumper X2 in pos.
0 W1
6 W2
12 W3

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 23


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Jumper settings for the FOM module

With the FOM it is possible to connect up to two external SWT 3000 via optical fibre to the Power-
Link PLC system (for each transmission direction one fibre).
In the PowerLink system two SWT 3000 can be connected via fibre optic cables (iSWT (A) and
iSWT (B)). The FOM modules are installed in the slots of the PU3f.
The PU3f in the external SWT 3000 is connected with the LAN interface and its serial synchro-
nous interface (SSI) via FOM to the PowerLink. From the point of view of the PowerLink the exter-
nal SWT 3000 is considered like integrated, because the internal LAN of the system is extended
through the fibre optic connection.

H2 Tx - Alarm

H3 Rx - Alarm

H9 H1
H8
H4
H5
Programming
H7
interface
H6

FOM

Figure 12: Position of the LED on the FOM

On the FOM no jumper settings are required. The LED indications are described in the following
table.
Table 26: Signification of the alarm LED on the FOM
LED LED-indication when lit
H1 red FPGA not ready
H2 red Tx-alarm. F6 supervisory alarm
H3 red Rx-alarm
H6 yellow MOD-alarm. Modulation alarm, carrier frequency at the optical receiver not detected.
H7 yellow COM-alarm. Communication alarm at the electrical interface.
H5 yellow BUF-alarm. Buffer overflow or under run. Source: Supervisory circuit of FPGA
H4 yellow ILAN high
H8 yellow SFP_LOS. The received optical power is below the receiver sensitivity. Loss of signal
H9 yellow S6 asserted

In case of FOM connection the configuration of the external SWT 3000 is


executed via the PowerLink with the PowerSys program. The service
interface of the PU3f in the external SWT 3000 can not be used.

Page - 24 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

The FOBox

The FOBox is used for connecting the SWT 3000 via optical fibre with a PDH- or SDH-Multiplexer.
For each transmission direction a separate fibre is necessary. The FO Box contains the FOM mod-
ule with the electrical/optical conversion, the interface to the multiplexer and a power supply. Fur-
ther details are described in chapter 1 of this manual.
An adaptor is installed for the conversion from the system connector to the alarm relay, the con-
nectors for the digital interface (X.21/G703.1/G703.6) and the power supply connector.

Selection of the Power supply


X.21 digital Interface 20-72V DC
22-60V AC -1
Tx - Alarm G703.1
G703.6 Imax=0,6A +2
Rx - Alarm X4

1
Alarm relay 2
3 X1
FO Connection X2

Figure 13: The fibre optic box

Interfaces of the FOBox

The interfaces of the FOBox will be carried out by an adapter converting the pinning of the FOB
module to a 15-pin female Sub-D connector according the subsequent table.
Table 27: Pinning of the Sub-D female connector X1
DTE FOB-X11
Pin Function X.21 Name X.21 Name Name Signal Pin
G.703.1 G703.6 Direction
1 Shield GNDS Shield Shield --- A1,A31,C1,
C31
2 Transmit(a) TxD_A TX- TX- OUT A12
3 Control(a) C(a) OUT A10
4 Receive(a) RxD_A RX- RX- IN A13
5 n.c.
6 Signal Timing(a) RxC_A IN A11
7 n.c.
8 Signal Ground GND G G --- A3
9 Transmit(b) TxD_B TX+ TX+ OUT A8
10 Control(b) C(b) OUT A14
11 Receive(b) RxD_B RX+ RX+ IN A9
12 n.c.
13 Signal Timing(b) RxC_B IN A15
14 n.c.
15 n.c.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 25


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Power supply of the FOBox

The supply voltage range is 20-72V DC or 22-60V AC


Table 28: Assignment of the X4 connector for the power supply
Pin Function
1 - 20-72 V DC
2 + 20-72 V DC

Alarm relay contacts of the FOBox


Table 29: Assignment of the X2 connector for the alarm output
Pin Function
1 alarm relay make contact
2 alarm relay break contact
3 alarm relay common contact

Signification of the LED

X17 X16 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X9
X19
isolation test
X18 X15 G703.6
coax/sym 1 X8
Tx - Alarm
H11
1
Rx - Alarm
H10 X14 X3 X2
G703.6 data interface
sym/coax selection
DCDC

Converter
bitrate 2M/64k
DCE / DTE

G703.1 / X.21

H9 H1
H8
H4 X5 X6 X7
alarm
H5 1 1 1 X12 relay
Programming
H7 loops
interface
H6

FOB 1

Figure 14: Position of the jumper and LED on the FOB module

Table 30: Signification of the alarm LED on the FOB


LED LED-indication when lit
H1 red FPGA not ready
H4 yellow ---
H5 yellow BUF-alarm. Buffer overflow or under run. Source: Supervisory circuit of FPGA
H6 yellow MOD-alarm. Modulation alarm, carrier frequency at the optical receiver not
detected.
H7 yellow COM-alarm. Communication alarm at the electrical interface.
H8 yellow SFP_LOS. The received optical power is below the receiver sensitivity. Loss of
signal
H9 yellow ---
H10 red RX-alarm. F6 supervisory alarm
H11 red TX-alarm

Page - 26 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Jumper settings of the FOB


Table 31: Selection of the digital interface
Jumper
Interface X2 X3 X6 X7 X14 X15 X16 X18 X19
X.21 Pin 1-2 1-2 2-3 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 1-2
2Mbit/s 11-12 11-12
X.21 Pin 1-2 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 1-2
64kBit/s 11-12 11-12

G703.1 Pin 3-4 3-4 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3
13-14 13-14

G703.6 Pin 5-6 5-6 1-2 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 1-2 2-3
sym. 15-16 15-16
G703.6 Pin 7-8 7-8 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 2-3 1-2
coax 15-16 15-16
Table 32: Setting options long haul or short haul
Operation mode Jumper X17
Long haul 1-2
Short haul 2-3
Table 33: Setting options normal mode / isolation test
Operation mode Jumper X8 Jumper X9
Normal mode 1-2 1-2
Isolation test 2-3 2-3
Table 34: Selection of DTE or DCE mode
Operation mode Jumper X5
FOB as DTE 2-3
FOB as DCE 1-2

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 27


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

ALR Module

The alarm module comprises as well three alarm outputs, switched by relay (K1 – K3). The three
relays provide change over contacts. In the standard setup the break contacts (NC) are used.

BI1/USYNC BI1/USYNC
X17 X16
IRIG B
5 6
X2 9 7 5 3 1 X14 X15
X18 3 4 FAST 10 8 6 4 2
5 31 1 2 SLOW

250V
Park

24V

110V
48/60V
H6 IRIG-B X3
6 42
5V
12V
24V
BI2
5 6
H5 BI1 X19 3 4 FAST BI2
1 2 SLOW 9 7531
X4 10 8 6 4 2

250V
Park

24V

110V
48/60V
H4 BI2

1 Test BI2
S1 Test BI1
n.u.
Test IRIG-B ALA1
X7 X6 X5
K1
H3 ALA1 ALA2
X10 X8
H2 ALA2 K2
X9
ALA3
H1 ALA3 X12
K3

X13 X11

Figure 15: Display and setting elements on the ALR module

Visual Indication

The module ALR provides a LED for visual indication of the state for each binary input and for
each alarm output. They are visible after removal of the front panel. The significations are shown in
the table below:
Table 35: ALR indication
LED Indication
H6 IRIG-B Input energized
H5 Binary Input 1 energized
H4 Binary input 2 energized
H3 Alarm output 1 activated
H2 Alarm output 2 activated
H1 Alarm output 3 activated

Test switch S1

For test purposes the module ALR provides a switch for each of the binary input circuits and for
the IRIG-B circuit. Closing a switch sets the output of the assigned circuit to the active state.
Table 36: Functions of the ALR test switch
Switch Function
S1.1 Binary Input 2 test
S1.2 Binary input 1 test
S1.3 n.u.
S1.4 IRIG-B test

Page - 28 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Jumper settings for the ALRS module

V7 R17
1
N1 R16
U2 X3 V8
X2 V4 R8
V3
1 R7
U1
N2
K1 K2 K3 X1

X6 X5 X4 X9 X8 X7 X12 X11 X10

Figure 16: Position of the jumpers on the ALRS module

Table 37: Selection of the operating point for the ALRS inputs
Input Operating threshold approx. Operating threshold approx.
15 V *) 54 V *)
Clock synchronization X3 1-2 X3 2-3

*) The max. possible input voltage is 250V DC.

Table 38: Selection of the relay contacts for the ALRS outputs
Relay Designation Break contact NC Make contact NO
K1 General alarm GALR X4 - X5 X5 - X6
K2 Pre- (Non-urgent) alarm NDALR X7 - X8 X8 - X9
K3 Receiver alarm EALR X10 - X11 X11 - X12

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 29


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

ALR jumper settings

The function of the ALR jumpers is shown in the table below.


Table 39: Setting options for the ALR module
Jumpers
X2 X3 X4 X5 – X13 X14 – X17
Binary Input 1

250V X2 – 7 / 8 *) open --- --- X14 – X15 *)


110V X2 – 1 / 2 open --- --- X14 – X15
48V / X2 – 3 / 4 open --- --- X14 – X15
60V
24V X2 – 5 / 6 open --- --- X14 – X15
fast X18 / 3 – 4
Input behaviour
slow X18 / 1 - 2
IRIG-B

24V open X3 – 1 / 2 --- --- X16 – X17


12V open X3 – 3 / 4 --- --- X16 – X17
5V open X3 – 5 / 6 --- --- X16 – X17
Binary Input 2

250V --- --- X4 – 7 / 8 *) --- ---


110V --- --- X4 – 1 / 2 --- ---
48V / --- --- X4 – 3 / 4 --- ---
60V
24V --- --- X4 – 5 / 6 --- ---
fast X19 / 3 – 4
Input behaviour
slow X19 / 1 - 2
Alarm Output 1 Relay K1

NC --- --- --- X5 – X6 *) ---


NO --- --- --- X6 – X7 ---
Alarm Output 2 Relay K2

NC --- --- --- X8 – X9 *) ---


NO --- --- --- X9 – X10 ---
Alarm Output 3 Relay K3

NC --- --- --- X11 – X12 *) ---


NO --- --- --- X12 – X13 ---
NC Break contact
NO Make contact
*) Default setting

Page - 30 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Commissioning

!
Warning!
This equipment may be supplied from different and from each other inde-
pendent dangerous voltages.
Before starting the maintenance work the device must be isolated with
the specified separators.

Switching on the power supply

After switching on the external power supply and with the device switched off (switch SV on PU3f
in down position refer also to figure 9 page 21) LED "i" (red) lights up on the power supply units.

Switching on the device

After switching on the device (switch SV on PU3f in up position refer also to figure 9 page 21) the
OK LED (green) must light up on the power supply unit and the operating LED (green or red) on
the PU3f module. The alarm LED (red) must not light up if the device is receiving properly and the
levels are set correctly.

Connecting the service PC

A PC and the operating program PowerSys are needed for start up and for maintenance and di-
agnostic purposes for the SWT 3000 system. The PC is connected at the SUB-D socket on the
front panel of the PU3f module. A description of the operating program can be found in Chapter 3
of this equipment manual.

PC requirements

Operating system Windows 2000 or Windows XP


Processor Pentium
Clock min 800 MHz
System memory 256 MB
CD drive
Serial interface RS 232
Printer interface (LPTx)

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 31


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

PC Connecting cable

The following diagrams show the possible variants for cable connections between the control PC
and the interface on the SWT 3000 front panel. Terminals 1-4-6 and 7-8 are connected at this
socket.

PC (com_x) PU3 PC (com_x) PU3

CD 1 1 CD 1 1
RD 2 2 RD 2 2
TD 3 3 TD 3 3
DTR 4 4 DTR 4 4
SG 5 5 SG 5 5
DSR 6 6 DSR 6 6
RTS 7 7 RTS 7 7
CTS 8 8 CTS 8 8
RI 9 9 RI 9 9

CD Common Data
PC (com_x) PU3 RD Receive Data
TD Transmit Data
CD 1 1 DTR Data Terminal Ready
RD 2 2 SG Signal Ground
TD 3 3 DSR Data Set Ready
RTS Request To Send
DTR 4 4 CTS Clear To Send
SG 5 5 RI Incoming call
DSR 6 6
RTS 7 7
CTS 8 8
RI 9 9

Figure 17: Possible cable variants for the connection of the service PC

Page - 32 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Settings on the device


The settings described in the following are based on the assumption that the device is already
configured. A complete new configuration is described in more detail in the section “SWT 3000 new
configuration“.

Setting of the SWT 3000 transmit level

After connecting the device to the transmission cable or to the PLC system via an analog interface
the output level must be set with the control PC.
To do this select <Device> in the Data Source menu. The program now reads all data stored in
the device into the control PC. Now select <Adjustment> and then <Levelling> from the subse-
quent SWT 3000 menu.

Figure 18: Setting the PU3f output level.

The output level can now be set in steps of 0.1 dB in the range from -40 to +4dBr with the menu
option < Output gain >.
Transmit level:
Measurement: At output socket yÎ of the CLE module
Setting: -10 dB

It must be noted that the level set at the PU3f on the CLE module will be further amplified
by about 11dB.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 33


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Operation with the PLC system PowerLink

When using the SWT 3000 with the PowerLink PLC system the following settings must be made
depending on the configuration:

Connection via a VFx module :

SWT 3000 PowerLink

PU3 CLE VFx CSP

1 2 3 4

Figure 19: Setting options for the protection transmit level for connection via VFx module

The output level of the PU3f (1) is set with the service PC and amplified by +11 dB on the CLE
module (2).
A level of -10 dB is required at the input of the VFx module (3). The levels in the PowerLink are
set automatically from the system depending on the device configuration. They are displayed in the
menu <Information / Service> and can be measured at the CSP resp. PLE output.
Table 40: SWT 3000 transmit level
Measuring point Level [dB] Comment
PU3f module output -21 Setting with control PC on the SWT 3000 PU3f-
module (1)
VFx input -10
CSP module output (4) dep. on device Automatic Tx level adjustment from the system
configuration
* In case of coded tripping (CT) the level has to be adjusted 6dB less. This is causing also 6dB less level at the output of
the CLE

SWT 3000 PowerLink


CLE X1 CFS VFx
P12V a18 Connector panel Port 3 resp. 4
RJ45
S6AB c3

S6AB_GND c5 wh/gn 3 S6IN_A

GND12 a20 gn 6 S6IN_B

F6AB_A c11 wh/or 1 4wire input A


F6AB_B c13 2 4wire input B
or
F6AN_A c7 bu 4 4wire output A
F6AN_B c9 wh/bu 5 4wire output B

Figure 20: Connecting cable between the SWT 3000 and the VFx module

Page - 34 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Connection of an external SWT 3000 to the PowerLink50/100

The PowerLink50/100 and the backplane from the CFS-2 has a different connector panel com-
pared with the older version. The connection of the CLE module from an external SWT 3000 is car-
ried out via SUB-D female connectors to the VFx modules. The principle is shown in the figures be-
low. In this case the VFx ports 3 resp. 4 must be used.

SWT 3000 PowerLink


CLE X1 CFS-2 VFx
P12V a18 Connector panel Port 3
SUB-D connector
S6OUT c3

S6OUT_GND c5 12 S6IN_A

GND12 a20 31 S6IN_B

F6OUT_A c11 10 4-wire input A


F6OUT_B c13 29 4-wire input B

F6IN_A c7 11 4-wire output A


F6IN_B c9 30 4-wire output B

Figure 21: Connecting an external SWT 3000 to the port 3 of the VFx modules

SWT 3000 PowerLink


CLE X1 CFS-2 VFx
P12V a18 Connector panel Port 4
SUB-D connector
S6OUT c3

S6OUT_GND c5 19 S6IN_A

GND12 a20 37 S6IN_B

F6OUT_A c11 14 4-wire input A


F6OUT_B c13 33 4-wire input B

F6IN_A c7 15 4-wire output A


F6IN_B c9 34 4-wire output B

Figure 22: Connecting an external SWT 3000 to the port 4 of the VFx modules

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 35


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Connection via a FOM module :

SWT 3000 PowerLink


Slot PU3f Slot FOx Slot PU3f

PU3f FOM FOM CSP


<3km
E

Figure 23: Connection of the SWT 3000 via FOM

With this system configuration it is possible to connect up to two external SWT 3000 via optical fi-
bre to the PowerLink system (for each transmission direction one fibre).
In the PowerLink system two SWT 3000 can be connected via fibre optic cables (iSWT (A) and
iSWT (B)). The FOM modules are installed in the slots of the PU3f.

Figure 24: Setting of the analog interface of the SWT 3000 for the FOM connection to the PowerLink

The PU3f in the external SWT 3000 is connected with the LAN interface and its serial synchro-
nous interface (SSI) via FOM to the PowerLink.
From the point of view of the PowerLink the external SWT 3000 is considered like integrated,
because the internal LAN of the system is extended through the fibre optic connection.
The basic (hardware) configuration for system and system-2 settings of the external
SWT 3000 is carried out at the external device with the PowerSys program. The system configu-
ration is shown in the figure 24 and the system-2 configuration in figure 25.

Page - 36 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

The system-2 configuration for the external SWT 3000 with FO connection to the PowerLink is
shown in the figure below:

System-2 settings in
the external SWT
connected via FOM

Figure 25: SWT 3000 system-2 configuration for FO connection to the PowerLink

In this form is defined which slot position (iSWT-1 or iSWT-2) of the FOM in the PowerLink is used
for the configuration of the external SWT 3000.
The further settings like VF variant, must be executed via the PowerLink. In this case the same
settings from the external SWT 3000 must be defined in the system and system-2 configuration of
the (iSWT) PowerLink. The connection via FOM must be established.

System-2 settings in
the PowerLink for the
SWT connected via
FOM

Figure 26: iSWT 3000 system-2 configuration for FO connection to the PowerLink

Due to the digital connection of the PU3f via the SSI it is in this case not possible to measure the
frequencies at the PU3f measuring jacks.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 37


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

PU3f integrated in the PowerLink:

Up to two SWT 3000 systems can be integrated in the PowerLink system and have to be defined
in the system configuration.
The iSWT can be used in the single purpose (SP) resp. in the multi purpose (MP) operation (with
voice resp. data channels). With voice transmission resp. DP the iSWT can be used also in the al-
ternate multi purpose operation mode (AMP).

PowerLink

PU3f CSP

Figure 27: The PU3f is connected via the serial synchronous interface (SSI) with the CSP

Table 41: Setting options for the iSWT


iSWT Option Signification

analog using the analog interface of the iSWT for protection signaling
optical connection of an external SWT 3000 via optical fibre module FOM
digital only using the digital interface of the iSWT for protection signaling

The transmit levels are automatically adjusted from the PowerLink system and displayed in the
menu <Information/Service>.
Due to the digital connection of the PU3f via the SSI it is not possible to measure the frequen-
cies at the PU3f measuring jacks.

Page - 38 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Connection of two SWT 3000 via FOM

The figure below shows the connection of two SWT 3000 systems via the FOM modules. In this
case the digital interface(s) (LID-1 resp. LID-2) of the SWT 3000 is used.

SWT 3000 SWT 3000


Slot PU3e Slot FOx Slot FOx Slot PU3e

PU3e FOM FOM PU3e


>80km

Converter
E E

Converter
RS422 RS422
DLE DLE
O O

Figure 28: SWT 3000 connection via FOM

System configuration

The digital interface can be adjusted to 64kbps (FOM 64k-DCE resp. DTE) or 2Mbps (FOM 2M-
DCE resp. DTE).

Figure 29: Example of a system configuration for a FOM connection with 64kbps

All setting options for the interfaces are shown also in table 46 on page 48. On the DLE module
in each case the X.21 interface has to be selected (ref. also to page 22).

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 39


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Connection of the SWT 3000 via FOM to a multiplexer

With the FOM module and an external FOBox the SWT 3000 can be connected to a multiplexer,
like shown in the figure below:

SWT 3000 FOB


Slot PU3f Slot FOx Slot PU3f
FOM FOM X.21
PU3f or
<3km G.703.1
Interface or

Converter
E converter
RS422 G.703.6

Adapter
DLE
O
Power Supply

Figure 30: SWT 3000 connection via FOM to a multiplexer

The digital interface of the SWT 3000 is always set to X.21. The desired interface in the FOBox is
selected by means of jumper. The jumper settings are shown on page 27.
The connection of the FOBox is shown on page 25.

System configuration

Figure 31: System configuration of the digital interface for the connection to a FOBox (example)

The digital interface is always DTE and can be set to 64kbps (FO-Box 64k) resp. 2Mbps (FO-Box
2M). All setting options for the interfaces are shown also in table 46 on page 48. On the DLE mod-
ule in each case the X.21 interface has to be selected (ref. also to page 22).

Page - 40 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Receive level for analog interfaces:

The incoming receive level on the trunk line can be measured at the input socket Îy of the CLE
and amplified by 0 dB, 6 dB or 12 dB with straps W1 - W3 (Table 2.5).

Figure 32: Setting the input level attenuation

The input level attenuation can be set from 0.0 - -60 dBr and is used for checking the receive level
reserve.
Receive level setting:
Measurement: At the input socket Îy of the CLE and PU3f.
Function range: +4 to -33dB at the input of the PU3f
When using a PowerLink straps W1 - W3 on the CLE must be set so as to give 0 dB at the input
of the PU3f. The operating thresholds for the receive level alarm and the option of disabling the
output in case on an S/N alarm can be set with <Configuration> <Receiver-Alarms>.
Table 42: Setting options for receiver alarm
Menu option Setting options Comments
Threshold for receive level alarm -30 dB / -24 dB / -18 dB Receive level on the CLE amplified by
0 dB (W1). Æ effective setting:
-30 dB / -24 dB / -18 dB
Receive level on the CLE amplified by
6 dB (W2). Æ effective setting:
-36 dB / -30 dB / -24 dB
Receive level on the CLE amplified by
12 dB (W3). Æ effective setting:
-42 dB / -36 dB / -30 dB
Activate EALR in case of S/N alarm Yes *) Relay receive alarm is also activated in
No case of S/N alarm.
Disable outputs in case of S/N alarm Yes Command output disabled in case of
No *) S/N alarm
Activate NDALR relay in case of Yes Relay NDALR is also activated in case
general alarm of general alarm
No *)
*) As-delivered state

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 41


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Setting parameters of measuring points

Once the levels have been set on the device and teleprotection signaling is functioning properly,
alarm operating thresholds can now be set for monitoring the PU3f and CLE outputs.
These can be set in the menu <Adjustment> <Measuring points>.

Figure 33: Setting the alarm thresholds.

Table 43: Setting options for measuring points


Menu option Comments
Standard Default values stored in the program are imported
for the individual measuring points
Read The current measured values are read from the
measuring points in the SWT 3000 device
-6dB of current value The current measured values are halved and en-
tered in the Min field as the threshold value for the
measuring point alarm.
Entering “0“ in the Min field deactivates monitoring. It is recommended that if the system is operat-
ing properly the current level values should be accepted with <Read> and the alarm thresholds de-
fined with <-6dB of current value>.
Failure to attain the PU3f output level activates the display on the PU3f module (flashing red LED
of the used interface) and transmitter alarm (SAL) on the CLE module.
Failure to attain the CLE output level activates the display SAL.

Page - 42 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Time/date

It is only possible to set the time and date after the data have been imported from a connected
device. The tab <SWT date/time> is then inserted in the <Adjustment> menu.

Figure 34: Setting of date and time of an SWT 3000

For the time adjustment the option <use PC system time> or a manual adjusted <new date> resp.
<new time> can be used (available from PowerSys versions ≥ P3.2.216). The internal clock is ad-
justed when operating the <Apply> or <OK> button.

Clock synchronisation

The system-internal clock can be synchronized by an external clock. The clock synchronisation
input (USYNC) on the module ALRS (terminal a1/c3) is provided for this. The operating point of the
input voltage can be set between 15V (strap x3 (1-2)) and approx. 54V (strap X3 (2-3)) (see also
connection of the ALRS module).

Figure 35: Options for the SWT 3000 clock synchronisation

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 43


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

The setting options for the local sync are described in the table below.
Table 44: Setting options for the local clock synchronisation of the iSWT
Adjustment local sync Remarks

OFF No local clock synchronisation

USYNC signal (minute or hour) An external impulse is received via the USYNC input every min-
ute resp. hour. The active signal slope rising or falling is syn-
chronising the RTC seconds.

IRIG-B00x (sync only) The IRIG-B message is received via the USYNC input and de-
coded. With each change of the IRIG-B minutes the RTC sec-
onds are synchronised

IRIG-B000 (RTC time adj.) The IRIG-B message is received via the USYNC input and de-
coded. With each change of the IRIG-B minutes the RTC sec-
onds are synchronised. Additional the IRIG-B-time (hour, min-
utes, seconds) is compared with the RTC time of the iSWT. In
case of a difference the IRIG-B values are taken over into the
RTC.

IRIG-B004 (RTC(time&date adj.) The IRIG-B message is received via the USYNC input and de-
coded. With each change of the IRIG-B minutes the RTC sec-
onds are synchronised. Additional the IRIG-B-time & date is
compared with the RTC time & date of the iSWT. In case of a
difference the IRIG-B values are taken over into the RTC.

NTP-Sync Synchronisation of the RTC with the network time protocol. This
function requires additional a SNMP Server V1.32 or higher

In case of using IRIG-B sync:


For input voltages of 5V and 12V the new alarm module ALR is required.
Otherwise the USYNC input of the ALRS module has to be adjusted to
24V and an additional level converter (TTL to 24V) is necessary.

In the configuration form for the clock synchronisation additional a non urgent alarm (NUALR) can
be activated in case of USYNC failure (see figure below).

Figure 36: Activation of NU alarm in case of USYNC failure

Page - 44 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Line clock synchronisation

It is also possible to synchronize the clock through one of the devices via the connecting route
(line sync. mode <off>, <Master>, <Slave>). The device that is to perform the synchronization is
designated as the “master“ and the device to be synchronized as the “slave“ d. This means that it
is only necessary to synchronize one device (the master) externally c.
The line synchronization is performed once a day at 24:00 resp. at the time defined with <Line
sync. hour> (available from PowerSys versions ≥ P3.2.216). by transmitting the synchronizing tone
(fs). The difference in time between master and slave must not be greater than ± 30 sec otherwise
clock synchronization is not possible. The maximum difference in the time between master and
slave is thus the signal run time.
Select <Line synch.> <off> for both devices if both devices are provided with external synchroniz-
ing pulses e. In this case synchronization between the devices is not implemented.

c d

ext. sync
fs 18:00

A A
L L
(i)SWT 3000 (i)SWT 3000
R R
S S

ext. sync ext. sync

A A
L L
(i)SWT 3000 (i)SWT 3000
R R
S S

Figure 37: Possibilities for the clock synchronisation

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 45


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

SWT 3000 new configuration

Configuration

Start the new configuration with the menu path <Data source>, <New> and <SWT 3000>.

Figure 38: New configuration of the SWT 3000

The program will then ask you to select the software package. The latest version is proposed
automatically by the program under Package selection.

Figure 39: Selecting the software package

When you have confirmed the selection with <OK> you must also define the name and place of
storage of the database in which the data will be stored.

Figure 40: Creating a database

Page - 46 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

The following menus are then available:

Figure 41: Input tabs for an SWT 3000

System configuration

Figure 42: Menu for the SWT 3000 system configuration

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 47


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Selecting the operating mode

The following settings are possible:


Table 45: Selection of the operating modes
Operating mode Comment
Mode 1 (double system protection) Possible with all variants
Mode 2 (single-phase protection) Not possible with the variants VF2, VF4 and IF2.00k1
Mode 3 (switching functions) Not possible with the variants VF2, VF4 and IF2.00k1
Mode 3a (4 independent commands) Only possible with the variants VF1_CT resp VF3_CT
Mode 3b (2 plus 2) Only possible with the variants VF1_CT resp VF3_CT
Mode 4 (only one command active) Not possible with the variants VF2, VF4 and IF2.00k1
Mode 5A (3 independent commands) Only possible with the variant VF[x] M5A or IF[x] M5A

The setting <stand alone> for a stand alone device or <integrated> for a device integrated in the
PowerLink must also be made with the <System> menu.
The teleprotection signaling parameter is set as <Single-purpose> for standalone devices. The
setting <Alternate multipurpose> is also possible in conjunction with PLC systems depending on
the configuration and parameters of the PLC system).

Selecting the connection interface

The menu option <Connection analog resp. digital> offers the following setting options:
Table 46: Connection options of the PU3f module
Connection analog Comment
off No analog interface
CLE Standalone devices with cable connection, or connection to a
(only with system setting <stand alone>) PLC system via the CLE module
via CSP (dig) If integrated in the PowerLink system
FOM-1 analog Stand alone device with FOM connection to a PowerLink
system
Connection digital
X.21 DTE / DCE Digital interface X.21 DTE or DCE
G703.1 DTE / DCE Digital interface G703.1 64kbps DTE or DCE
G703.6 DTE / DCE Digital interface G703.6 2Mbps DTE or DCE
FOM 64k DTE / DCE Fibre optic connection between two SWT 3000 with 64kbps
FOM 2M DTE / DCE Fibre optic connection between two SWT 3000 with 2Mbps
FO-Box 64k Fibre optic connection to the FO-Box bit rate 64kbps
FO-Box 2M Fibre optic connection to the FO-Box bit rate 2Mbps

The menu option <Reflection> ; “Yes “ or “No “ offers the additional option of reflecting the
received command if there is no local energizing (setting “Yes”).
This setting is only evaluated by the device in the operating modes ”Mode 1 (Double system pro-
tection)“ or “Mode 2 (Single-phase protection)“. In these modes the fourth binary input of the
IFC-D/P module can be used for excitation. In the operating mode “Mode 3 (Switching functions)“
this input is provided for the fourth command. If continuous commands are transmitted with the
device, you must also activate the option “Continuous signaling ;”. In this case the device
sends the guard tone for 180 ms at cyclical intervals so that a connection can be re-established
automatically after a line interruption or failure of a device. In this case the command output time
must be increased accordingly (see timer settings).
All settings made are accepted by the program by choosing <Apply>. If you click on <Cancel> the
previous setting are retained. With <OK> the settings are accepted and the input tab is closed.

Page - 48 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

SWT 3000 <System-2 Configuration>

The number and type of the interface module IFC-x is defined in the <System-2 Configuration>
tab. You can configure a redundant power supply under <Power supply>. You also set the protec-
tion scheme and switch over to the test mode here.

Figure 43: Defining the IFC interface modules

Interfaces

Only IFC-D or IFC-P modules can be inserted at slot IFC1. Slot IFC2 can also be equipped with
the IFC-D/P modules or alternatively with the IFC-S module. You will find more detailed information
about the interface modules in Chapter 4 of this equipment manual.
If using two IFC-D/P modules it is possible to use only the contact outputs from the second mod-
ule by activating <Contact doubling>, or to use also the binary inputs for the transmission of 8
commands (only via digital transmission path!).
Please check the <Input Configuration>!

Power supply

If the SWT 3000 is operated with two power supplies monitoring of the second power supply must
be activated under <System-2 Configuration> by selecting <Power Supply> redundant ;“.

Test mode

You switch over to test mode with the test mode setting <IFC-Test>. In this mode you can enter
commands on the IFC module for every input by means of DIL switches S1.1 to S1.4.

For security reasons after switching over to test mode all inputs are sig-
nalled by the controller as “off” regardless of the actual switch position.
The “on“ state can only be reached by switching all switches to the
“Open“ position and then on.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 49


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Application

coded transmission
Switch over from the F6 modulation to the coded transmission (description in chapter 1). For the
operating modes 3, M5A resp. 6 the coded transmission is not adjustable.
direct tripping:
This setting offers enhanced transmission security of the analog interface and should be selected
for teleprotection systems with direct tripping (use of the IFC-D). The transmission time is about
3ms longer compared with the setting <permissive tripping>).
permissive tripping:
This setting should be selected for permissive protection systems.

Output allocation

Figure 44: Output allocation for operating mode Mode M5A

In the SWT 3000 system every possible combination of binary inputs is permanently assigned a
protection frequency depending on the operating mode (Mode 1 to Mode 5A) and the function Un-
blocking “On“ or “Off”.
At the receive end every protection frequency can be assigned to one or more signal outputs
(BA1 to BA4) with the output allocation for the operating mode Mode 3a and 5A.
In digital operation it is also possible to assign the outputs to the activated binary inputs for the
operating mode Mode 5D.
A preset allocation can be loaded with <Default>. All allocation settings are deleted with <Clear>.
The setting made can also be stored as files with <Save> and called up again with <Load>.
This assignment is permanently set for the operating modes Mode 1, 2, 3 and Mode 4 and can-
not be changed with the output allocation.

Page - 50 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

SWT 3000 <RM> configuration:

Device data can be transmitted between the terminal devices of one or more SWT 3000 routes
using RM. This makes it possible to import the parameter settings, the measuring points and the
event list of the distant station from an SWT 3000 with the control PC.
The device data are transmitted by binary frequency modulation (FSK) of the idle tone (guard) via
the analog interface resp. via the frame of the digital interface. The RM function is activated in the
menu <Configuration> <RM>. The device must also be assigned an RM address.
For remote configuration via the RM channel the corresponding check box has to be activated.

Figure 45: RM Configuration menu

Setting options for the RM configuration:


Table 47: Setting options for RM configuration
Menu option Setting options Comments
Remote Maintenance ; RM activated
RM deactivated
Device address 0 to 249 RM address
Interface RM Master Setting remote station Slave
Slave Setting remote station Master
Interface SSB Master Setting remote station Slave
Slave Setting remote station Master
Config. via inband RM.Channel: ; Configuration of the remote device
yes/no via RM channel enabled

Configuration of the remote device


via RM channel disabled

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 51


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Setting options for the SWT 3000 <Timer> configuration

Figure 46: The SWT 3000 timer tab

Table 48: Settings of the SWT 3000 timer configuration


Selection Setting options Comments
Duration of Unblocking impulse 0 – 300 ms in steps of 0 = no Unblocking pulse.
10 ms Note: Different assignment of the
IF4 output relays in operating
Modes 1 and 2 when using the
Unblocking pulse. Further infor-
mation in Chapter 1 of the
SWT 3000 equipment manual.
Delay of receiver alarm 0 – 2000 ms in steps of Delay time until the receiver
50 ms alarm is output

Delay of S/N and/or BE alarm 0 – 2000 ms in steps of Delay time until the S/N alarm is
50 ms output
Time slot 10 – 100 ms in steps of This setting is only possible with
10 ms operating mode Mode 3 (switch-
ing functions). The transmission
duration of the assigned com-
mand inputs is defined here (e.g.
in case of continuous signaling).

Page - 52 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Configuration of the command input resp. output

Figure 47: Setting options for the command input

Table 49: Setting options for input limitation


Command input Setting options Comments
Limitation of input command 0 - 2000 ms in steps of 1 ms Longer pulses result in Non urgent
alarm the command transmission is
interrupted.
From PowerSys p3_2_2x the
limitation is fixed to 1000 ms in the
AMP mode

Input limitation 50 ms

Binary Input t
0 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 ms

Tx Output t
0 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 ms

Figure 48: Example for input limitation set to 50 ms

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 53


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Table 50: Setting options for input command extension to min.


Command input Setting options Comments

Input command extension min. 0 - 100 ms in steps of 0 = no extension


1 ms
The commands at the binary input are extended to adjusted value in case they are shorter. If they
are longer this adjustments is irrelevant.
The figure below shows one command (red) at the binary input with a length of 10ms. This is ex-
tended to 15 ms. The next command (blue) has a length of 30 ms. This command is not extended.
Input extension to min 15 ms

Binary Input t
0 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 ms

Tx Output t
0 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 ms

Binary Input t
0 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 ms

t
Tx Output
ms
0 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

Figure 49: Example for an input command extension to min 15ms.

Page - 54 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

With Command Input-2 a pulse suppression in the range 0 – 100 ms in steps of 1 ms can be ad-
justed for each released binary input.

Figure 50: Setting options for the pulse suppression

Pulse suppression 5 ms

Binary Input t
0 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 ms

Tx Output t
0 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 ms

Figure 51: Example for a pulse suppression of 5 ms

Note:
Commands which are shorter than the adjusted pulse suppression time
are not transmitted by the iSWT!

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 55


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Timer settings for the command output

Figure 52: Setting options for limitation of the output command

Table 51: Setting ranges for limiting or increasing the output time
Command output Setting options Comments

Limitation of output command 0 or to 500 ms 0 = no limitation


The command in the example below is transmitted for 700 ms (Tx output). With the activated out-
put limitation the command output is switched off after 500 ms.
Output limitation 500 ms

Tx Output t
0 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 ms

t
Rx Output
ms
0 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800

additional Rx alarm!

Figure 53: Example of an activated output command limitation

Page - 56 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Figure 54: Setting options for the output command extension

Table 52: Setting ranges for the output command extension


Command output Setting options Comments

Output command extension 0 - 2000 ms in steps of


5 ms
The command in the example below is transmitted for 50 ms (Tx output). With the output com-
mand extension on the Rx output it is extended for 200 ms.
Output extension 200 ms

Tx Output t
ms
0 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800

t
Rx Output
ms
0 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800

Figure 55: Example for an output extension of 200 ms

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 57


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Setting recommendations for the SWT 3000 timer configuration

Broadband versions
Table 53: Timer settings for broadband versions

Single- Timer Command input Command output


purpose opera-
tion

Duration of EALR re- S/N alarm Pulse sup- Command Limiting of *) Increase
the Unblock- lay delay delay [s] pression extension to output time in output
ing pulse [ms] [ms] min. [ms] [ms] time by [ms]
Double sys- 0 2000 2 0 15 to 500 0
tem protection
Single-phase 0 2000 2 0 15 to 500 0
protection
Switching 0 2000 2 0 15 none 100
functions
Switching functions: Time slot 20ms
*) If continuous signaling is activated the increase in the output time must be set to min. 180 ms

Table 54: Alarm settings for broadband versions

Single-purpose Alarms
operation

Threshold for EAL in Activate EALR in Disable the outputs Switch NDALR relays in
[dB] case of S/N alarm in case of S/N alarm case of GAL
Double sys- -30 yes no no
tem protection
Single-phase -30 yes no no
protection
Switching -30 yes no no
functions

Page - 58 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Table 55: Timer settings for alternate purpose operation

Alternate mul- Timer Command input Command output


tipurpose opera-
tion

Duration of EALR re- S/N alarm Pulse sup- Command Limiting of *) Increase
the Unblock- lay delay delay [s] pression extension to output time in output
ing pulse [ms] [ms] min. [ms] [ms] time by [ms]
Double sys- 0 2000 2 0 15 to 500 0
tem protection

Single-phase 0 2000 2 0 15 to 500 0


protection

Switching 0 2000 2 0 15 none 100


functions
Switching functions: Time slot 20ms

Table 56: Alarm setting for alternate multipurpose operation

Alternate Alarms
multi-purpose
operation

Threshold for EAL in Activate EALR in Disable the outputs Switch NDALR relays in
[dB] case of S/N alarm in case of S/N alarm case of GAL
Double sys- -20 yes yes no
tem protection

Single-phase -20 yes yes no


protection

Switching -20 yes yes no


functions

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 59


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Narrow band versions


Table 57: Timer settings for narrow band versions

Single-purpose Timer Command input Command output


operation

Duration of EALR re- S/N alarm Duration of EALR re- S/N alarm
the Unblock- lay delay delay [s] the Unblock- lay delay delay [s]
ing pulse [ms] ing pulse [ms]
Double system 0 2000 2 0 25 to 500 0
protection
Single-phase pro- 0 2000 2 0 25 to 500 0
tection
Switching func- 0 2000 2 0 25 none 200
tions
Switching functions: Time slot 30ms
*) If continuous signaling is activated the increase in output time must be set to min. 180 ms

Table 58: Alarm setting for narrow band versions

Single-purpose Alarms
operation

Threshold for EAL in Activate EALR in Disable the outputs Switch NDALR relays in
[dB] case of S/N alarm in case of S/N alarm case of GAL
Double system -30 yes no no
protection

Single-phase pro- -30 yes no no


tection

Switching func- -30 yes no no


tions

Programming the device

After all settings have been completed you have to save all the changes in the device with click on
the button . The PU3f module is then reset and the device is ready for operation again after-
wards.

Page - 60 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

SWT 3000 Alarms

Alarm output via the ALRS or ALR module

In the SWT 3000 system alarms are distributed with the relay contacts of the ALRS resp. ALR
module. An alarm is active, when the relay is de-energized.
The following alarms are distributed:
 General alarm (GALR)
 Receiver alarm (EALR)
 Pre-alarm (NDAL)
When the alarms appear they are immediately written into the event recorder even if the output
via the alarm relays is delayed!
The module is identical with the ALRS from the system SWT 2000 F6 however in the system
SWT 2000 F6 the 3 alarm relays are designated with GENALR (General alarm), SALR (Transmitter
alarm) and EALR (Receiver alarm).
Table 59: Allocation of the alarm contacts on the ALRS module
Alarm contact on the ALRS System SWT 2000 F6 System SWT 3000
GENALR (=GALR) GENALR GALR
EALR EALR EALR
SALR SALR Pre-Alarm (NDALR)
In the system iSWT 30000 (integrated in the PowerLink ) the alarms are distributed via the ALRS
module which is controlled from the CSP module. The alarms from the iSWT 3000 are transmitted
cyclically via LAN to the CSP.

Alarms on the CLE

On the CLE module (only with the analog line interface LIA in the SWT 3000) the following alarm
LED are existing:
 Transmitter alarm SAL
 Receiver alarm EAL
 Signal to / Noise level alarm S/N
Table 60: Alarm displays on the CLE module
LED Reason(s)
SAL (red) SAL_CLE: Output level to low (alarm from internal measuring point)
EAL (red) EAL_CLE: Receive level alarm (PAL) or limit of the command output time (COx) ex-
ceeded
S/N (red) S/N: Signal-to-noise alarm
The alarm output depends as well on the configuration of the device (primary and secondary path,
no secondary path, LIA and LID, only LID resp. only LIA) as shown in the examples below.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 61


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Possible reasons for the alarms


Table 61: Alarm relays and possible alarm reasons
Relay Possible Reason Remark
GALR Normal operation interrupted
(general alarm)
PU3f Measuring point alarm (MAL) additional Pre-Alarm

Transmission path faulty no alternative path additional EALR

Primary and secondary path not available. additional EALR and Pre-Alarm

IFC Test operation OK LED on PU3 green blinking

Module alarm resp. configuration alarm OK LED red


EALR Guard alarm, transmission path not available no additional GALR
(receive alarm) alternative path.
Guard alarm Primary and secondary path not additional GALR and Pre-Alarm
available

Time limit for the command output exceeded The command output is interrupted. The
alarm is deactivated when the command
transmission is cancelled

Output of the unblocking impulse (when acti-


vated) at operation mode 3...5x
NDAL Primary path not available but secondary path Switch over to the alternative path
(Pre-Alarm) existing.

Primary and secondary path not available additional GALR and EALR

Power fail of one power supply in case of redun- No interrupt as long as the second power
dant power supply supply is working

LIA signal to noise alarm Command outputs blocked with default


settings

LID bit error alarm (bit error rate is > 1x10-3) Command outputs blocked with default
settings

Switch NU-Relais on GAL is activated in the Additional GALR ref. to table 62 on page
alarms control configuration 64. This function is not available when
two transmission path are used!

Time limit for the command input exceeded The command transmission is interrupted.
The alarm is deactivated when the com-
mand input is cancelled.

Page - 62 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Special features for the output of the unblocking impulse

The activated unblocking impuls (for more details refer to table 48 on page 52) can be connected
via the IFC-D/P card when using the operation modes 1 and 2. When working with other operation
modes the following system behavior has to be observed:

Stand alone equipment:

In the stand alone equipment an activated unblocking impulse (tunbl>0) in the operation
mode3...5A is executed via the EALR relay on the ALRS module. This means there is no relay left
for the receiver alarm. The receiver alarm is indicated as general alarm GENALR.

SWT 3000 integrated in the ESB 2000i

In the integrated equipment the unblocking impulse is executed via the PU3f signal output EALR
(X1/b13). In the ESB 2000i system the PU3f line connector is equipped with a relay and the control
logic to operate the IFC compatible unblocking relay mounted in the cabinet.
The receiver alarm from the iPU3f is furthermore combined with the ESB 2000i alarms and dis-
tributed via the ALRE module!
Signal position: On the IFC a make contact is always used for the signaling of the unblocking (at
mode 1 and 2). This means unblocking is active when the contact is closed. In case of unblocking
signaling via EALR the active position of the relay has to be considered (an alarm is active when
the relay is de-energized).

SWT 3000 integrated in the PowerLink system

The receive alarm output of the PU3f module (RXALR) can be allocated to the unblocking impulse
in the PowerSys service program (see figure 56 page 64). The RXALR output can be ranked to an
alarm relay (see figure 57 page 65).
In case of unblocking signaling via RXALR and ALRS card the active position of the relay has to
be considered (an alarm is active when the relay is de-energized).

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 63


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Setting options for the SWT 3000 <Alarms>

Figure 56: The SWT 3000 Alarms control form

Table 62: Setting options for the SWT 3000 alarm control
Selection Setting options Comments
Threshold for receive level alarm -30 to -10 dB in steps of When the PU3 input level drops about the
5 dB adjusted value, this is causing receive
alarm
Threshold for S/N alarm -20 to -10 dB in steps of In case of an worse SNR then adjusted
5 dB this is causing S/N alarm. -20 dB is the
most sensitive adjustment.
S/N Time 1 up to 30 sec in steps of Measuring time for the signal to noise ratio
1 sec.
Force receiver alarm on S/N and/or ; Receive alarm relay is activated in case of
BE alarm S/N alarm or bit error alarm

† Function deactivated
Blocking outputs on S/N and/or BE ; Command output disabled in case of S/N
alarm alarm or bit error alarm

† Function deactivated
Switch NU relay in case of GAL ; Pre-alarm relay is additional activated in
case of general alarm

† Function deactivated
Alarm output EALR used for Receive alarm EALR Allocation of the receive alarm to the alarm
output EALR

Unblocking UNBL Allocation of the unblocking impulse to the


alarm output EALR (for unbl. impulse ref.
to table 48 page 52)

Input limitation alarm Allocation of the input limitation alarm to


IMPLIM the alarm output EALR (adjustment of the
input limitation see table 49 page 53)

Page - 64 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Configuration of the alarm output RXALR in the PowerLink

If integrated in the PowerLink system the RXALR output can be allocated to an alarm relay in the
ALRS configuration form.

Figure 57: Allocation of the EALR output from the iSWT to an alarm contact

Alarm messages in the service program PowerSys

Figure 58: The Alarm messages menu

In case of fault, which makes it impossible to run the normal operation the system produces fault
indications. This are displayed in the form <PowerLink /Information / System> “Alarms / Errors”.
The display is refreshed with the button <Read>.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 65


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Index:

A J

Alarm messages 65 Jumper settings


AMP 38 ALR 30
ALRS 29
CLE 23
B IFC 20
PU3 21
backplane with FOM 10
battery connection 8
L
C LIA Signals 14
LID-1 Signals 15
Commissioning 31 LID-2 Signals 16
Connecting plugs 8, 10 line synchronization 45

F M

FOBox 25 MP 38
Alarm contact 26
connection to a multiplexer 40
Interfaces 25 N
Jumper settings 27
LED 26 New Configuration 46
Power supply 26 NFD-module 34
FOM
connection of two SWT 3000 39
LED 24 O
PowerLink connection 36
Output gain 33

G
P
Grounding 7
Pin assignment
ALR 19
I ALRS 18
CLE 17
IFC connection 12 IFC-x 12
IFC slots 9 PU3 13
IFC-D 9 Programming 60
IFC-P 9 Protection scheme 50
IFC-S 9
IFCx 11
Installation procedure 7 R
integrated PU3
VF-range 38 receive level reserve 41
Interfaces 49 recommendations
iSWT settings narrowband versions 60
clock synchronisation 43 RM 51
clock synchronisation IRIG-B 44
date/time 43

Page - 66 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

S T

safety regulations 4 temperature 5


service channel 16 Test mode 49
Service-PC 31 time slot 52
Connecting cable 32 timer 52
requirements 31 Transport 5
Settings 33
measuring points 42
receive level 41 U
transmit level 33
SP 38 Unblocking 52, 58, 59, 60
sub rack 9
sub rack with FOM 11
W
SWT 3000 Alarms 64
System configuration
Warning 4
for iSWT 38

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 67


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Appendix:

List of figures:

Figure 1: View of a SWT 3000 backplane without FOM slots -------------------------------------------------------------- 8


Figure 2: Equipment of the sub rack with two SWT 3000 systems---------------------------------------------------------- 9
Figure 3: View of a SWT 3000 backplane with FOM slots -----------------------------------------------------------------10
Figure 4: Equipment of the sub rack with a SWT 3000 system for using FOM modules -------------------------------11
Figure 5: Contact assignment of the interface module IFC-x --------------------------------------------------------------12
Figure 6: Connection principle for the binary inputs of the IFC-D/P modules ------------------------------------------12
Figure 7: Connection sockets X1 and X2 for the digital interfaces--------------------------------------------------------14
Figure 8: Position of jumpers X43 to X58 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------20
Figure 9: Position of the jumpers on the PU3f module ---------------------------------------------------------------------21
Figure 10: Position of the jumpers on the DLE module ----------------------------------------------------------------------21
Figure 11: Position of the jumpers on the CLE module ----------------------------------------------------------------------23
Figure 12: Position of the LED on the FOM-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------24
Figure 13: The fibre optic box ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------25
Figure 14: Position of the jumper and LED on the FOB module------------------------------------------------------------26
Figure 15: Display and setting elements on the ALR module----------------------------------------------------------------28
Figure 16: Position of the jumpers on the ALRS module ---------------------------------------------------------------------29
Figure 17: Possible cable variants for the connection of the service PC --------------------------------------------------32
Figure 18: Setting the PU3f output level.---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------33
Figure 19: Setting options for the protection transmit level for connection via VFx module --------------------------34
Figure 20: Connecting cable between the SWT 3000 and the VFx module ------------------------------------------------34
Figure 21: Connecting an external SWT 3000 to the port 3 of the VFx modules------------------------------------------35
Figure 22: Connecting an external SWT 3000 to the port 4 of the VFx modules------------------------------------------35
Figure 23: Connection of the SWT 3000 via FOM ----------------------------------------------------------------------------36
Figure 24: Setting of the analog interface of the SWT 3000 for the FOM connection to the PowerLink --------------36
Figure 25: SWT 3000 system-2 configuration for FO connection to the PowerLink -------------------------------------37
Figure 26: iSWT 3000 system-2 configuration for FO connection to the PowerLink ------------------------------------37
Figure 27: The PU3f is connected via the serial synchronous interface (SSI) with the CSP ----------------------------38
Figure 28: SWT 3000 connection via FOM ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------39
Figure 29: Example of a system configuration for a FOM connection with 64kbps --------------------------------------39
Figure 30: SWT 3000 connection via FOM to a multiplexer ----------------------------------------------------------------40
Figure 31: System configuration of the digital interface for the connection to a FOBox (example)--------------------40
Figure 32: Setting the input level attenuation----------------------------------------------------------------------------------41
Figure 33: Setting the alarm thresholds. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------42
Figure 34: Setting of date and time of an SWT 3000--------------------------------------------------------------------------43
Figure 35: Options for the SWT 3000 clock synchronisation ----------------------------------------------------------------43
Figure 36: Activation of NU alarm in case of USYNC failure ---------------------------------------------------------------44
Figure 37: Possibilities for the clock synchronisation ------------------------------------------------------------------------45
Figure 38: New configuration of the SWT 3000 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------46
Figure 39: Selecting the software package -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------46
Figure 40: Creating a database -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------46
Figure 41: Input tabs for an SWT 3000-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------47
Figure 42: Menu for the SWT 3000 system configuration--------------------------------------------------------------------47
Figure 43: Defining the IFC interface modules -------------------------------------------------------------------------------49
Figure 44: Output allocation for operating mode Mode M5A ---------------------------------------------------------------50
Figure 45: RM Configuration menu---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------51
Figure 46: The SWT 3000 timer tab---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------52
Figure 47: Setting options for the command input ----------------------------------------------------------------------------53
Figure 48: Example for input limitation set to 50 ms -------------------------------------------------------------------------53
Figure 49: Example for an input command extension to min 15ms. --------------------------------------------------------54
Figure 50: Setting options for the pulse suppression -------------------------------------------------------------------------55
Figure 51: Example for a pulse suppression of 5 ms--------------------------------------------------------------------------55
Figure 52: Setting options for limitation of the output command -----------------------------------------------------------56
Figure 53: Example of an activated output command limitation ------------------------------------------------------------56

Page - 68 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Figure 54: Setting options for the output command extension---------------------------------------------------------------57


Figure 55: Example for an output extension of 200 ms-----------------------------------------------------------------------57
Figure 56: The SWT 3000 Alarms control form -------------------------------------------------------------------------------64
Figure 57: Allocation of the EALR output from the iSWT to an alarm contact--------------------------------------------65
Figure 58: The Alarm messages menu ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------65

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 69


Installation and Commissioning SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

List of tables:

Table 1: Arrangement of the connecting plugs of the SWT 3000 ------------------------------------------------------------- 8


Table 2: Equipment options for slots IFC_1 to IFC_4 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Table 3: Arrangement of the connecting plugs of the SWT 3000 ------------------------------------------------------------10
Table 4: Pin assignment of the PU3f --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Table 5: Pin assignment for interface LIA--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14
Table 6: Pin assignments for interface LID-1----------------------------------------------------------------------------------15
Table 7: Signals for the X-21 interface for LID-1-----------------------------------------------------------------------------15
Table 8: Signal for the G703.1 and G703.6- interface for LID-1------------------------------------------------------------15
Table 9: Pin assignments for the LID-2-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Table 10: Signals for the X-21 interface for LID-2 --------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Table 11: Signals for the G703.1 and G703.6 interface for LID-1 --------------------------------------------------------16
Table 12: Signals for the service channel interface--------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Table 13: Pin assignment of the remote access interface SSR--------------------------------------------------------------16
Table 14: Pin assignment of the remote monitoring interface SSB --------------------------------------------------------17
Table 15: Pin assignment of the CLE ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17
Table 16: Pin assignment of the ALRS module -------------------------------------------------------------------------------18
Table 17: Connection of the alarm relays-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18
Table 18: Pin assignment of the ALR ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19
Table 19: Assignment of jumpers X43 to X58---------------------------------------------------------------------------------20
Table 20: Function of the jumpers on the PU3f module---------------------------------------------------------------------21
Table 21: Selection of interfaces for the LID-1-------------------------------------------------------------------------------22
Table 22: Interface selection for the LID-2 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------22
Table 23: Selection of the input gain for the G703.6 interfaces ------------------------------------------------------------22
Table 24: Jumper setting for the input and output impedance--------------------------------------------------------------23
Table 25: Jumper setting for the receive signal gain ------------------------------------------------------------------------23
Table 26: Signification of the alarm LED on the FOM----------------------------------------------------------------------24
Table 27: Pinning of the Sub-D female connector X1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------25
Table 28: Assignment of the X4 connector for the power supply-----------------------------------------------------------26
Table 29: Assignment of the X2 connector for the alarm output -----------------------------------------------------------26
Table 30: Signification of the alarm LED on the FOB ----------------------------------------------------------------------26
Table 31: Selection of the digital interface------------------------------------------------------------------------------------27
Table 32: Setting options long haul or short haul----------------------------------------------------------------------------27
Table 33: Setting options normal mode / isolation test ----------------------------------------------------------------------27
Table 34: Selection of DTE or DCE mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------27
Table 35: ALR indication--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------28
Table 36: Functions of the ALR test switch -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------28
Table 37: Selection of the operating point for the ALRS inputs ------------------------------------------------------------29
Table 38: Selection of the relay contacts for the ALRS outputs ------------------------------------------------------------29
Table 39: Setting options for the ALR module --------------------------------------------------------------------------------30
Table 40: SWT 3000 transmit level --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------34
Table 41: Setting options for the iSWT ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------38
Table 42: Setting options for receiver alarm ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------41
Table 43: Setting options for measuring points ------------------------------------------------------------------------------42
Table 44: Setting options for the local clock synchronisation of the iSWT -----------------------------------------------44
Table 45: Selection of the operating modes-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------48
Table 46: Connection options of the PU3f module---------------------------------------------------------------------------48
Table 47: Setting options for RM configuration------------------------------------------------------------------------------51
Table 48: Settings of the SWT 3000 timer configuration --------------------------------------------------------------------52
Table 49: Setting options for input limitation---------------------------------------------------------------------------------53
Table 50: Setting options for input command extension to min.------------------------------------------------------------54
Table 51: Setting ranges for limiting or increasing the output time -------------------------------------------------------56
Table 52: Setting ranges for the output command extension ---------------------------------------------------------------57
Table 53: Timer settings for broadband versions ----------------------------------------------------------------------------58
Table 54: Alarm settings for broadband versions----------------------------------------------------------------------------58
Table 55: Timer settings for alternate purpose operation ------------------------------------------------------------------59
Table 56: Alarm setting for alternate multipurpose operation -------------------------------------------------------------59

Page - 70 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Installation and Commissioning

Table 57: Timer settings for narrow band versions--------------------------------------------------------------------------60


Table 58: Alarm setting for narrow band versions---------------------------------------------------------------------------60
Table 59: Allocation of the alarm contacts on the ALRS module ----------------------------------------------------------61
Table 60: Alarm displays on the CLE module -------------------------------------------------------------------------------61
Table 61: Alarm relays and possible alarm reasons-------------------------------------------------------------------------62
Table 62: Setting options for the SWT 3000 alarm control -----------------------------------------------------------------64

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 71


PowerLink 50/100 Equipment Manual

Chapter 3: Service Program PowerSys and


MemTool flash programming

For the Equipments PowerLink and SWT 3000

For PowerSys versions ≥P3.3.25x

PC Features 4

Installation of the service program 4

Menus in the PowerSys 8

Event recorder of the (i)SWT 3000 18

Firmware upgrade with MemTool 20


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Table of contents

Service program PowerSys ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4


PC requirements------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Installation of the service program---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Starting the service program ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
The menu options ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Create system log -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Connection ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
The PowerSys menu -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Print Preview ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
FW Package Import / Export:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
The <data source> menu --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Data source <Device> --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Data source <File> ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Data source <New> -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Data source <Remote device>-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
The <Firmware> menu ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Firmware <Download>-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Firmware <Dongle Upgrade> -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Considerations before dongle upgrade -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Dongle upgrade on site -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Display after the connection has been established --------------------------------------------------------------------------15
The form <Commands> ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
The iSWT3000 event recorder --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18
General information -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18
Display of the entries in the event recorder --------------------------------------- Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.
Firmware upgrade with MemTool ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------20
General information -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------20
System Requirements---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------20
Version of MemTool ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------20
Installation of MemTool --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21
Basic Settings---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------22
Starting MemTool-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------22
MemTool Settings ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------22
Getting Started--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------25
Programming of Flash memory in the PowerLink--------------------------------------------------------------------------26
Connecting the PC ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------26
Starting MemTool----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------27
Connection to the PowerLink target -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------28
Programming the application into the Flash Memory -----------------------------------------------------------------------28
PowerSys release upgrade check -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------31
PowerSys release--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------31
Programming of Flash memory in the PowerLink vMUX ----------------------------------------------------------------32
Connecting the PC ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------32
Starting MemTool----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------33
Connection to the vMUX target ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------34
Programming the application into the Flash Memory -----------------------------------------------------------------------34
PowerSys release upgrade check -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------37
PowerSys release--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------37
Programming of Flash Memory in SWT 3000 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------38
Connecting the PC ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------38
Starting MemTool----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------39
Connection to the SWT 3000 target -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------40
Programming the application into the Flash Memory --------------------------------------------------------------------40
PowerSys release upgrade check-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------42

Page - 2 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

PowerSys release--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------42
Trouble Shooting-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------43
Index Directory --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------44
Appendix ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------45
List of figures: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------45
List of tables: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------46

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 3


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Service program PowerSys


The service program PowerSys is required for commissioning and for maintenance and diagnosis
of the PowerLink or SWT 3000 units. The following description applies to the program versions
≥P3.3.2xx. The term “SWT 3000" is employed below for Stand-alone protection signalling units and
"iSWT" for devices integrated in the PowerLink. The service PC must meet the following require-
ments:

PC requirements

Operating system Windows 2000 or Windows XP


Processor Pentium or better (or processor with equivalent perform-
ance)
Clock min. 800 MHz
System memory 256 MB
CD drive
Serial interface RS 232
Printer interface (LPTx)

Installation of the service program

With the program versions ≥P3.3.1xx multiple installation is possible. Older versions may be re-
moved.
With Start/Control Panel/Software uninstall older PowerSys versions with click on
change/remove
Note: Data files stored in older versions e.g. in C:\Program Fi-
les\PowerSys\P3.x.y\DeviceFiles are not uninstalled and may be used again after re-
installing the older version.
Install the new service program
The service program is delivered on a CD-ROM. Please run the Setup.exe. The program leads
you through the installation.

Figure 1: Start of the setup program for installation of the PowerSys

Regional settings other than “German” or “English (UK)” may cause


problems. It is strongly recommended to switch Windows to one of the
above mentioned settings (Start/Control panel/regional settings). Reason
for the problems are the different formats for numbers, date and time.

With the PowerSys software the SWTStraps program is installed as well. The program is very
useful to find the jumper settings for the iSWT modules.

Page - 4 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Starting the service program


After starting the program the following menu appears:

Alarm display:
Red = Alarm activated (only if the
connection to the device existing!)
HW module alarm
CFG Configuration fault
G General alarm
TX Transmitter alarm
RX Receiver alarm
S/N Signal to noise alarm
NU Non urgent alarm
REM Fault in the remote station
FSK FSK Alarm
DP DP switched to secondary
bitrate

Status of the connection to the


device

Figure 2: PowerSysWin2000 service program

Menu bar: The menu bar is located at the top edge of the screen:
PowerSys
Data source
Firmware
Options
Help

With the buttons below the following functions can be carried out:

Save, print
Data source file, New data file
Program device data, sent configuration to the device
Data source device, remote device, abort the connection
Figure 3: Functions of the PowerSys buttons

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 5


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

The menu options

With the menu options the serial interface of the PC to the device has to be configured. If neces-
sary the program language can be adjusted as well.
In the versions ≥P3.2.216 the Language English resp. Russian is selectable.

Figure 4: Selection of the program language

Create system log

With an online PowerLink resp. SWT 3000 session the <Create system log> function is activated
in the options menu.

Figure 5: The create system log function

The function may be used in case of problems occurring in a PowerLink resp. SWT 3000 connec-
tion.
It creates an encoded zip file containing important system information including the database of
the equipment or the event memory from an (integrated) SWT 3000.
Please send the zip file to SIEMENS office for evaluation.

Page - 6 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Connection

The timeout for the serial interface


of the service PC is adjustable
from 4 – 60 sec.

In case of RM connection the


timeout of the RM channel has to
be adjusted in the <PowerLink
Configuration RM> form.

Figure 6: Configuration of the serial interface from the Service PC

The communication to the device can be carried out either via the serial interface from the PC or
via a TCP/IP connection. The configuration is done after operating the button.

The timeout for the LAN interface


of the service PC is adjustable
from 4 – 60 sec.

Figure 7: Configuration for the TCP/IP connection

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 7


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

The PowerSys menu

Figure 8: The PowerSys menu

Table 1: Functions of the PowerSys menu


Selection Function
Save Saving the device configuration in an existing file.
Save As Saving the device configuration in a new file
Program device Saving the adjustments in the device
Send Config. to Device Saving an „Off line“ configuration in the device
Print Print out of the complete device data
Print Preview Print preview. Possibility to store the preview in a file
Print Setup Modification of the printer setup
FW Package Import from firmware package for program updates
Exit Abort PowerSys program

Print Preview

With selecting <Print Preview> the program prepares a print preview which is displaying either the
equipment settings of the PowerSys program or, if opened, the event memory from an integrated
SWT 3000 in a window as shown below.

Saving the print preview in


the PDF or RTF format.

Print out

Figure 9: Display of the print preview

Page - 8 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Afterwards the print out can be started with selecting the <Print> button. If selecting the <File>
button the print preview is saved in a file using the “pdf” or “rtf” format. Using this function it is also
possible to save the event memory of the SWT 3000 (resp. an iSWT). The file can be read later by
means of the Acrobat reader (resp. an word processor if using the “rtf” format).

Figure 10: Saving the print preview in a file

FW Package Import / Export:

In the PowerSys service program the equipment software, is stored in firmware packages and not
using single files. With the function <FW Package Import> a new software version can be inte-
grated in the PowerSys program. With the function <FW Package Export> a file is taken out of the
program.
With the selection of <FW Package Export” the following window is displayed:

Selection of the Firm-


ware packages.

Selection of the file.

Figure 11: Selecting a file for the export from the firmware (example package 58)

With OK the FW export is carried out and the file stored in the sub directory „Firmware“.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 9


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

The <data source> menu

Select the device


type

Figure 12: The "Data source" menu

Table 2: Functions of the data source menu


Selection Meaning Remark
Device Establishing the connection to the
device
Remote device Establishing the connection to a
remote device
Disconnect Disconnecting the device
File Load the parameter from a file
New New configuration Select the device type
Close

Data source <Device>

By selection of "Device" the data are read in from the connected terminal. The program attempts
to establish a connection to the unit (PowerLink or SWT 3000) and subsequently loads the data of
the unit into the system memory of the service PC. Subsequently the downloaded data can be pro-
cessed. The program detects from which unit (PowerLink or SWT 3000) the data were read and
automatically changes to the appropriate program level.

Data source <File>

A sub-menu is opened for selecting the file to be loaded.

Figure 13: Loading the data from an existing file

After the file has been loaded, the data can be modified or programmed in the device.

Page - 10 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Data source <New>

After selection of the menu item <New> a menu appears for selection of the device to be param-
eterized, since the program for parameterization of the PowerLink and SWT 3000 is required:
The item SWT 3000 in this menu should be selected in the case of a Stand-alone unit. If the
SWT 3000 is integrated in the PowerLink (iSWT), PowerLink must be selected. Then the software
release has to be selected:

Figure 14: Release selection

Afterwards a file for the new database has to be defined.

Figure 15: Defining a new database

In case of changing an existing PowerLink configuration the “Clear CDB”


command should be used before programming the new configuration into
the CSP. For more details ref. to page 17.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 11


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Data source <Remote device>

Remote device denotes the "Remote Monitoring" function of the unit. By means of this function
device data can be transmitted between the terminals of one or more carrier frequency (CF) routes
or between two PowerLink or SWT 3000 units. The corresponding sub-menu is displayed after se-
lection of < Remote device > in the "Data source" menu.

This function requires the activating of the RM and a corresponding con-


figuration and address setting in the devices.

With selection of “Remote device” the following window appears:

Figure 16: Window for establishing a remote connection

The target device address is entered here, i.e. of the unit with which a RM link is to be estab-
lished. The RM address of the connected unit is set by means of the "Configuration" menu.
The address is set and confirmed by entry of [OK] or aborted by entry of [Esc or Cancel]. After the
connection is assembled, all data of the remote device are downloaded. This procedure needs ap-
prox. 15 minutes due to the equipment configuration. Then the selection level for data processing
appears. However there are no adjustments possible !

The <Firmware> menu

Figure 17: Menu for Firmware Release download and Dongle Upgrade

Firmware <Download>

The Firmware Download function is used only for the PowerSys release upgrade which is neces-
sary after a firmware download. Further download functions are disabled! For detailed description
refer to page 31 in this chapter!
For Firmware download the MemTool programm is required. It is provided with the PowerSys
CD-ROM. You will find a detailed description about installation and firmware download with Mem-
Tool from page 20 in this chapter!
The Firmware <Download> button is only activated, if no PowerLink connection has been estab-
lished (with data source device). Only the cable between PC and PowerLink must be connected.

Page - 12 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Firmware <Dongle Upgrade>

Additional features can be enabled afterwards via firmware dongle upgrade.

For dongle upgrade a corresponding upgrade file containing the correct


serial number of the dongle is required!

Considerations before dongle upgrade

Which hardware is existing? Have to be ordered additional modules? Is the function of the system
still ensured after the upgrade (change of the bandwidth, transmit power)?

Dongle upgrade on site

The customer orders additional features and advertises the serial number of the dongle. The new
FW-MLFB and the serial number of the dongle is stored as new dongle file in the data base of the
factory. The new dongle file will be send to the customer by email (resp. CD or floppy disc).
The update of the PowerLink on site is carried out with the PowerSys program using this file. The
program has to be started and a connection to the PowerLink must be established.
Start the upgrade with the command <Firmware / Dongle Upgrade>

Figure 18: The menu Firmware Dongle Upgrade

A menu is displayed where it is possible to enter the name of the dongle file or to use a browser.

Browser

Figure 19: Selecting the dongle file by entering the name

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 13


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

When operating the browser button the following menu appears for selection of the dongle file.

Figure 20: Opening the dongle file with the browser function

With operating the <OK> button in the <Select dongle file> menu, the PowerSys overwrites the
existing dongle with the new releases.

The dongle on the CSP module is only updated if the serial number in the
dongle file and the serial number in the dongle is identical.
For dongle upgrade of one link at least two dongle files are necessary!

Page - 14 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Display after the connection has been established


The following figure shows an example after the data has been downloaded from a PowerLink
unit, resp. from an PowerLink file or on a new configured PowerLink unit. If the data are being pro-
cessed by a SWT 3000 unit a similar menu is displayed with the designation SWT 3000.
The subordinated levels are displayed when selecting “+”.

When selecting „+“ the subordi-


nated levels are displayed.

Figure 21: Example of an loaded PowerLink device configuration

The following applies to all menus:

OK: Take over the adjustments and close the menu.


Cancel: Close the menu without taking over the adjustments.
Apply: Taking over the adjustments without closing the menu.

For explanation of the different items like Information, Configura-


tion, Adjustments etc. please refer to chapter 4 “Commissioning”.

In case of a fault display due to a mismatch between the existing service


program and the version stored in the PowerLink system an upgrade
must be carried out (ref. also to page 20).

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 15


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

The form <Commands>

In the PowerSys form <Commands>, it is possible to activate the DP signal generator, to switch
test loops or to enable the AMP measuring.

Figure 22: The PowerSys form commands

The form is only online available and divided into the following sections:
Remote test loops VFx resp. FOM if the service is enabled:
Reflection of the received signals from the corresponding service to the transmission
line
DP commands Signal <Generator>:
Activation of the DP signal generator when selecting “on[sine]” and pushing the but-
ton “center”. The corresponding HF frequency is displayed in the PowerSys form <In-
formation/Services>. For more details please ref. to chapter 4 commissioning.
With the button “upperB” resp. “lowerB” the signal generator is adjusted to the upper
resp. lower band limit of the DP. With the buttons <UP> resp. <DOWN> the signal
generator can be adjusted upwards resp. downwards in steps of 10, 100 or 1000 Hz.
DP commands xMUX:
Setting a local test loop for the xMUX
SL Loops, setting StationLink loops (off, local loop, remote loop) for more details re-
fer to chapter 4 resp. 5
Monitoring:
Possibility to switch a local IF loop. AGC resp. AFC switch OFF for test purposes
only! Activation of the AGC hold for switching the AGC to a fixed value.

Page - 16 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

SWT 3000 Commands


Line selection automatic (only if two transmission links are activated): Automatic se-
lection of the (primary) transmission line. In case of fault switch over to the alternative
(secondary) line.
Primary (only if two transmission links are activated): The SWT 3000 receiver is fixed
to the primary transmission line. This setting is causing general alarm!
Secondary (only if two transmission links are activated): The SWT 3000 receiver is
fixed to the secondary transmission line. No switch over in case of line interrupt. This
setting is causing general alarm!
AMP Meas Off/On (from PowerSys version ≥P3.2.216 to P3.3.228): Disables the
input limitation from the binary inputs (which is automatically activated in the AMP
mode of the (i)SWT 3000) when adjusted to On. It is now possible to send continu-
ous commands for measuring the trip frequencies. The corresponding HF frequen-
cies are displayed in the PowerSys form <Information/Services>.
The GENALR is activated in case of AMP Meas is adjusted to On!
General commands
Local HF loop: Transmitter and receiver have to be adjusted to the same frequency
and are looped with this command. The transmission via the PLE (and via the line) is
interrupted.
AXC start: Manual start of the AXC function (if enabled). This may cause an inter-
rupt of the PowerLink receive signal. The AXC is adjusted automatically after restart
of the PowerLink.
Clear CDB (from PowerSys version ≥P3.2.216): The command “Clear Configura-
tion Database“ will clear the complete configuration (!) stored in the CSP resp.
PU3 module. After the command has been executed, you may receive hardware
and/or configuration fault alarm. The function has to be executed in case of a new
configuration from an existing PowerLink resp. SWT 3000 or after a firmware update
to clear all former settings.
Reset: Reset of the PowerLink via the service PC. After Reset the service program is
automatically connected back to the PowerLink.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 17


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

The iSWT3000 event recorder

General information

Protection commands and alarms of the iSWT3 are provided with time and date and a registration
number before they are entered in the event memory. The following events are entered:
 Incoming protection commands from IFC-D/P,
 Outgoing protection commands to the IFC-D/P,
 Detected alarms,
 Program restart.
 Changing date and/or time
 Changing the configuration
Up to 2000 entries with a time resolution of 1ms are possible. They are read out by the service PC
and this is also possible from the remote station by means of Remote Monitoring. In case of an
overflow the oldest entry in the event memory is overwritten.
The event recorder can be read only when the PowerSys program is connected to the device
(PowerLink with integrated SWT3000 or external SWT3000). It is available in the form <Information
/ iSWT3000-x / Event Recorder>

Selecting the type of


events

Selecting the number


of events

Reading the events

Figure 23: The event recorder in the PowerSys service program

The number and type of events is selectable like shown in the figure above. The event recorder
can’t be cleared from the user!
Subsequently the display of the entries is described.

Page - 18 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Display of the entries in the event recorder

The figure below shows the contents of an event recorder:


[nr] [date] [time] [gnr] [enr] [comment]

[nr] record number


[gnr] group identifier
[enr] event identifier

Figure 24: Entries in the event recorder

In the first four lines the fixed records are displayed without event number:
Table 3: Fixed entries in the event recorder
Line Nr. gnr enr Explanation

1 1 1 Last start up of the PU3f firmware


2 3 20 Last successful clock synchronisation (if activated)
3 3 25 Last change of the device data (not date or time change!)
90 Last change of the line selection to LIA
4 3 91 Last change of the line selection to LID1
92 Last change of the line selection to LID2

Each record is marked with [date] year.month.day and [time]


hour:minute:second.hundreth.thousandth, [gnr] group identifier, [enr] event identifier and [com-
ment]. The event record numbers [nr] are entered from the PU module from 0 to 9999. After 9999
the event-counter restarts with 0!
For better understanding of the event recorder entries time and date on the PU3f should be set
with PowerSys before starting operation! During power off, time and date is saved on the PU3f for
at least 5 hours.
Table 4: Group numbers
gnr Explanation

1 System control
2 Tele protection commands
3 Alarms
4 Alarms
128 - 255 Internal system messages

Note:

The displayed comments have the same signification than the combination of group and
event identifier [gnr] / [enr].

In case of the comment : Internal system message contact your responsible SIEMENS
office !

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 19


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Firmware upgrade with MemTool

General information

This description is the upgrade instruction for the controller cards of PowerLink and SWT 3000.
For firmware download of PowerLink and SWT 3000 a dedicated Flash PROM programming tool
can be used. The MemTool flash programming software is provided with the PowerSys CD-ROM
and ensures easy and quick product upgrade if required.
The document describes the upgrade of PowerLink_CSP and SWT 3000_PU3 units in the All In
One mode. Target files are delivered as AllInOne*.jnk. Typically the files are part of the PowerSys
software package available on CD-ROM.

System Requirements

To run MemTool at least the following minimum system configuration is required.


• IBM Personal Computer or 100% compatible
• Pentium (or higher) processor running at 90 MHz with 32 MByte RAM
• Operating System Windows 2000 (SP2 or higher), Windows XP
• Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or higher
• 10 MByte space on local hard-disk
• CD-ROM drive for installation
• Standard serial port interface

Version of MemTool

MemTool release V1.12

Page - 20 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Installation of MemTool

For installing MemTool change to the PowerSys CD-ROM \MemTool directory.

It is necessary to install MemTool under administrator rights. Furthermore


it is required to remove previous MemTool versions prior to installation.

• Start SETUP.EXE from the PowerSys/MemTool CD-ROM


• Click Next to continue the installing process or click Cancel for aborting

Figure 25: Starting the MemTool installation

Accept the terms of license agreement and click Next - Next


Choose the destination location installation via the Browse button. Please advise an
empty or new directory for the MemTool software. Click Next.
Select the Program Folder and click Next to continue
Select the Minimal type of Installation and click Next - Install
Click Finish to continue and end the installation process

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 21


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Basic Settings

Starting MemTool

For launching MemTool as a stand-alone tool, execute Memtool.exe via the Windows Main menu
Start - Programs -UDE MemTool.

Figure 26: Starting the MemTool program

MemTool Settings

When starting MemTool for


the first time, the Select
Target Configuration dia-
log is displayed. Otherwise,
this dialog can be reached
via the menu
Target – Change.

The installation of MemTool


provides target files for se-
lection of Siemens CSP
(PowerLink) and PU3 (SWT
3000) systems.

Select Siemens PowerLink -


CSP and click OK.

Figure 27: Target selection

Page - 22 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Select >File >Setup and click Create Verify


Protocol File. Click OK

Figure 28: MemTool general settings

Select >Target >Setup/General and choose the


access device (usually Serial Port 1).

Settings in Setup/Init/Monitor are default and re-


main unchanged. Click OK

The Baud rate in /Monitor is set automatically ac-


cording the selected Target file (57600 for CSP
and 38400 for PU3).

On the dialog box Save changes to target configu-


ration file click Yes.

Figure 29: Target Setup

Select >Device >Setup/Mapping and verify Start


address 0x0 and other settings as shown.

Figure 30: Setup Mapping

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 23


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Figure 31: Setup Program

Select Setup/Verify and click Try to use Check-


sum Calc. for Verify if not enabled.

Setting for Setup /Driver /Protection are default


and remain unchanged. Click OK

Figure 32: Setup Verify

Page - 24 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Getting Started

To perform the upgrade verify if required firmware type and version for upgrade are available.
One or both of the following files shall be existing
• ALLInOne_CSP_Px.y.z.jnk required for PowerLink upgrade (module CSP)
ALLInOne_VMUX_Px.y.z.jnk required for PowerLink upgrade (module vMUX)
• ALLInOne_PU3_Px.y.z.jnk required for SWT 3000 upgrade (module PU3)
The Firmware package is stored
• on the PowerSys CD (as a part of the PowerSys installation package)
• on the PC with PowerSys already upgraded to the new version (default destination
folder C:\Program Files\PowerSys\Px.y.z\Firmware) or on a
• folder of own choice while receiving the upgrade version by email or download.
Px.y.z = PowerSys release version
Copy the required AllInOne*.jnk files from the installed PowerSys directory
…\PowerSys\Px.y.z\Firmware or folder of own choice (email or download) onto the PC running
MemTool to the directory ….Memtool\Targets onto the PC running MemTool (default C:\Program
Files\pls\UDE Memtool\Targets).

Figure 33: Copy of the AllInOne*.jnk files from the firmware folder to the Memtool targets

It is also possible to use the MemTools <Open file> button and select
the AllInOne file in the Firmware folder of the corresponding PowerSys
version

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 25


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Programming of Flash memory in the PowerLink

Connecting the PC

For programming the CSP module the SSP connector (X14) has to be used. The connection to
the PC is established with the normal PC connection cable which is used for the PowerSys service
program. To enable the programming with “MemTool” the switch S2/1 must be in “ON” position.
1. Switch OFF the device with S1
2. To enable the programming with MemTool switch S2/1 to ON position
3. Switch ON the device
4. Press Reset S5 to proceed the upgrade

Figure 34: The CSP board

Page - 26 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Starting MemTool

For launching MemTool as a stand-alone tool, execute Memtool.exe via the Windows Main menu
Start - Programs -UDE MemTool.

Figure 35: Memtool with the PowerLink target

When starting MemTool for the


first time, the Select Target
Configuration dialog is dis-
played. Otherwise, this dialog
can be reached via menu Tar-
get – Change.

Select Siemens PowerLink-


CSP and click OK.

Figure 36: Selecting the Siemens PowerLink-CSP target

Wrong target selection will result in unsuccessful flash programming. Ver-


ify that the target selected is the device physically connected.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 27


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Connection to the PowerLink target

For external FLASH modules the sector table is created on connect after determining the actual
type of the FLASH. The Sector list box is empty at this time.
Please click on the Connect button to establish connection to the target PowerLink system. Now
the sector list box contains the sector table of the selected FLASH module and the connect button
changes to disconnect.

Figure 37: Display after the connection to the PowerLink has been established

Programming the application into the Flash Memory

Please click on the Open File button and select the AllInOne_CSP_Px.y.z.jnk (on the first time
you may have to select File type All Files or jnk Files and to navigate to the source folder ac-
cording chapter Getting Started). Click Open. After loading this file, in the left part of the MemTool
window the file name and a list of sections of the application are displayed.

Select the actual Power-


Sys Firmware version

Figure 38: Selection of the AllInOne files

Page - 28 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Click on Select All and then on Add Selection. The sections of the application are displayed (ac-
cording to the sectors they belong to) in the list box on the right-hand side.

Figure 39: Display of the sections in the list box after the Add Select has been executed

Wrong file selection will result in unsuccessful flash programming. Verify


that the file selected matches to the target and device physically con-
nected.

Please click on the Program button to


start the programming cycle. The Execute
MemTool Command dialog will be opened
to show the programming progress. The
upgrade starts with erase of the flash,
programming and finally verification.

Figure 40: Starting of the programming process

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 29


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Figure 41: Display after a successful programming

After successful upgrade Exit the command dialog, click Disconnect and Exit to close the Mem-
Tool in the main view.

! Switch OFF the Power on the CSP module. Move S2/1 back to the OFF
position.

In case vMUX or SWT 3000 is integrated continue with vMUX resp. SWT 3000 flash programming
otherwise switch Power ON (CSP-Reset).

Page - 30 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

PowerSys release upgrade check


Connect the service PC to the front SUB-D connector X15 from the CSP and start the PowerSys
service program. With the menu <Firmware Download> the service program is connected to the
PowerLink.

Figure 42: Starting the firmware download

PowerSys release

On the top of the form the FW release is shown. If the release in the device (displayed under “cur-
rent”) and the release of the actual service program (displayed under “new”) are different <select>
is marked ; and the download button is activated.

P3.2.218/101 Rel.: P3.3.2xx/2xx

Figure 43: Display of the PowerSys FW Release

Verify the PowerSys current and new release and click Download for update of the release. The
Download button is only activated if the current and new release is different.

This PowerSys upgrade check must be carried out after each software
upgrade with Memtool, because the PowerSys version is not included
in the “AllInOne” files!

Continue with commissioning and configuration using PowerSys on the serial port X15 as de-
scribed in detail in the PowerLink manual.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 31


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Programming of Flash memory in the PowerLink vMUX

Connecting the PC

For programming the vMUX module the SSP connector (X14) has to be used. The connection to
the PC is established with the normal PC connection cable which is used for the PowerSys service
program. To enable the programming with “MemTool” the switch S2/1 on the vMUX and switch
S2/2 on the CSP module must be in “ON” position.
1. Switch OFF the device with S1 on the CSP
2. To enable the programming with MemTool switch S2/1 on the vMUX and switch
S2/2 on the CSP to ON position
3. Switch ON the device
4. Press Reset S5 to proceed the upgrade

X6

H1G
BGAL H1R
H2G
H2R
MUX H3G
H3R
SL H4G
fE1 H4R

PowerLink / vMUX
H4
SSP
X14 H5
Diagnostic LED
H10 - H14

H6
H10 H14 S2
1 S2/1=Memtool 1
2 S2/2=Mon/App
H11 H15
2
X7
3 S2/3=Debug H12 H16 3
4 S2/4=Selftest 4
H13 H17

Reset S5

SSF X15

Figure 44: The vMUX board

Page - 32 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Starting MemTool

For launching MemTool as a stand-alone tool, execute Memtool.exe via the Windows Main menu
Start - Programs -UDE MemTool.

Figure 45: Memtool with the vMUX target

When starting MemTool for the


first time, the Select Target
Configuration dialog is dis-
played. Otherwise, this dialog
can be reached via menu Tar-
get – Change.

Select Siemens PowerLink-


vMUX and click OK.

Figure 46: Selecting the Siemens PowerLink-vMUX target

Wrong target selection will result in unsuccessful flash programming. Ver-


ify that the target selected is the device physically connected.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 33


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Connection to the vMUX target

For external FLASH modules the sector table is created on connect after determining the actual
type of the FLASH. The Sector list box is empty at this time.
Please click on the Connect button to establish connection to the target vMUX system. Now the
sector list box contains the sector table of the selected FLASH module and the connect button
changes to disconnect.

vMUX

Figure 47: Display after the connection to the vMUX has been established

Programming the application into the Flash Memory

Please click on the Open File button and select the AllInOne_VMUX_Px.y.z.jnk (on the first time
you may have to select File type All Files or jnk Files and to navigate to the source folder ac-
cording chapter Getting Started). Click Open. After loading this file, in the left part of the MemTool
window the file name and a list of sections of the application are displayed.

vMUX

Select the actual Power-


Sys Firmware version

Figure 48: Example for selection of the AllInOne files

Page - 34 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Click on Select All and then on Add Selection. The sections of the application are displayed (ac-
cording to the sectors they belong to) in the list box on the right-hand side.

vMUX

Figure 49: Display of the sections in the list box after the Add Select has been executed

Wrong file selection will result in unsuccessful flash programming. Verify


that the file selected matches to the target and device physically con-
nected.

Please click on the Program button to


start the programming cycle. The Execute
MemTool Command dialog will be opened
to show the programming progress. The
upgrade starts with erase of the flash,
programming and finally verification.

Figure 50: Starting of the programming process

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 35


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Figure 51: Display after a successful programming

After successful upgrade Exit the command dialog, click Disconnect and Exit to close the Mem-
Tool in the main view.

! Switch OFF the Power on the CSP module. Move S2/2 on the CSP and
S2/1 on the vMUX back to the OFF position.

In case SWT 3000 is integrated continue with SWT 3000 flash programming otherwise switch
Power ON (CSP-Reset).

Page - 36 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

PowerSys release upgrade check


Connect the service PC to the front SUB-D connector X15 from the CSP and start the PowerSys
service program. With the menu <Firmware Download> the service program is connected to the
PowerLink.

Figure 52: Starting the firmware download

PowerSys release

On the top of the form the FW release is shown. If the release in the device (displayed under “cur-
rent”) and the release of the actual service program (displayed under “new”) are different <select>
is marked ; and the download button is activated.

P3.2.218/101 Rel.: P3.3.2xx/2xx

Figure 53: Display of the PowerSys FW Release

Verify the PowerSys current and new release and click Download for update of the release. The
Download button is only activated if the current and new release is different.

This PowerSys upgrade check must be carried out after each software
upgrade with Memtool, because the PowerSys version is not included
in the “AllInOne” files!

Continue with commissioning and configuration using PowerSys on the serial port X15 as de-
scribed in detail in the PowerLink manual.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 37


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Programming of Flash Memory in SWT 3000

Connecting the PC

For programming the SWT 3000 the front connector of the PU3e has to be used. The connec-
tion to the PC is established with the normal PC connection cable which is used for the PowerSys
service program.
1. Switch OFF the device
2. Enable the programming mode with jumper X17 on the PU3 module in position 2-3

! 3. In case SWT 3000 is integrated into PowerLink switch S2/2 on the CSP to ON po-
sition
4. Switch ON the device
5. Press Reset S1 to proceed the upgrade

1
1
X17 X3 34
X14 X13
X8
X15
S1
1 X16
H1
Connection of the IFC Connection of the DLE
H2 modules
X1

26

X10

1
1 X7
26
X9 X6 1

Figure 54: Position of the jumpers on the PU3 module

Table 5: Functions of the PU3 jumpers


Jumper X16 Function Jumper X17 Function
1-2 Normal operation 1-2 Normal operation
2-3 Monitor operation 2-3 Programming with
Memtool

Earlier versions of the PU3 have 2 pins on jumper X17. The operating
position of jumper X17 is pin 1 and the MemTool programming posi-
tion is 1-2 for such modules.

Page - 38 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Starting MemTool

To launch MemTool as a stand-alone tool, execute Memtool.exe via the Windows Main menu
Start - Programs -UDE MemTool.

Figure 55: Start up from Memtool program with the target Siemens SWT 3000-Pu3

When starting MemTool for the


first time, the Select Target
Configuration dialog is dis-
played. Otherwise, this dialog
can be reached via menu Tar-
get – Change.

Select Siemens SWT 3000-


PU3 and click Okay.

Figure 56: Selecting the target file Siemens SWT 3000-PU3

Wrong target selection will result in unsuccessful flash programming. Ver-


ify that the target selected is the device physically connected.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 39


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Connection to the SWT 3000 target

For external FLASH modules the sector table is created on connect after determining the actual
type of the FLASH. The Sector list box is empty at this time. Please click on the Connect button to
establish connection to the target system SWT 3000. Now the Sector list box contains the sector
table of the selected FLASH module and the connect button changes to disconnect.
If the connection fails please reset the PU3 module and try again (refer also to page 43).

Figure 57: Display of the selected FLASH module after connection of a SWT 3000

Programming the application into the Flash Memory

Please click on the Open File button and select the AllInOne_PU3_Px.y.z.jnk (on the first time
you may have to select File type All Files or jnk Files and to navigate to the source folder). Click
Open. After loading this file, in the left part of the MemTool window the file name and a list of sec-
tions of the application are displayed.

Select the actual Power-


Sys Firmware version

Figure 58: Display after loading the AllInOne_PU3_*.jnk file

Page - 40 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Click on Select All and then on Add Selection. The sections of the application are displayed (ac-
cording to the sectors they belong to) in the list box on the right-hand side.

Figure 59: Display of the sections in the list box after the Add Select has been executed

Wrong file selection will result in unsuccessful flash programming. Verify


that the file selected matches to the target and device physically con-
nected.

Please click on the Program button to


start the programming cycle. The Execute
MemTool Command dialog will be opened
to show the programming progress. The
upgrade starts with erase of the flash,
programming and finally verification.

Figure 60: The Memtool programming progress

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 41


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Figure 61: Display of the successful FLASH programming

After successful upgrade Exit the command dialog, click Disconnect and Exit to close the Mem-
Tool in the main view. Switch OFF Power on the SWT / PowerLink system. Move jumper X17
back to position 1-2 on the PU3 module.

!
In case SWT is integrated in PowerLink switch S2/2 on the CSP back to
the OFF position.

PowerSys release upgrade check

Connect the service PC to the front plug of the PU3 module and start the PowerSys service pro-
gram. With the menu <Firmware Download> the service program is connected to the SWT 3000
(refer to figure 42 on page 31).

PowerSys release

On the top of the form the FW release is shown. If the release in the device (displayed under “cur-
rent”) and the release of the actual service program (displayed under “new”) are different <select>
is marked ; and the download button is activated.

P3.2.218/101 Rel.: P3.3.2xx/2xx

Figure 62: Display of the PowerSys FW Release

Verify the PowerSys current and new release and click Download for update of the release. The
Download button is only activated if the current and new release is different.

This PowerSys upgrade check must be carried out after each software
upgrade with Memtool, because the PowerSys version is not included
in the “AllInOne” files!

Page - 42 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Trouble Shooting

In case no connection to the target is established click View and verify the connection failed re-
port. Reset the device with S1 on the PU3 and / or S5 on the CSP and press retry for the con-
nection to the device.

Figure 63: Display in case no connection to the target device is established

MemTool always starts with the last used target selection. If the up-
grade fails kindly check that the target (menu Target>Change) and the
file selection (menu File >Open) do correspond to the device physi-
cally connected (Target is PowerLink-CSP and the file is AllI-
nOne_CSP_P*.jnk for PowerLink resp. target is PowerLink-vMUX and the
file is AllInOne_VMUX for the vMUX. The file AllInOne_PU3_P*.jnk for
protection signaling system SWT 3000-PU3). In case of wrong combina-
tion repeat the download after correct selection.

Hotline Support
Please contact support.energy@siemens.com and add a detailed description of your trouble.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 43


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Index Directory

CSP programming 26
General information 20
( installation 21
preparing SWT 3000 38
(i)SWT 3000 preparing the PowerLink 26, 32
event recorder 18 PU3e programming 38
trouble shooting 43
D
P
data source 10
device 10 PC features 4
file 10 PowerSys
new 11 installation 4
RM 12 menu bar 5
dongle menu buttons 5
upgrade 13 print preview 8
Regional settings 4
Starting 5
F
upgrade check 31, 37
FW Package 9
Export 9 S
Import 9
save the event memory 9
support 43
L

language 6 T

TCP/IP 7
M

Memtool V
basic settings 22
connection to SWT 3000 40 vMUX 32
connection to the PowerLink 28
connection to the vMUX 34

Page - 44 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys

Appendix

List of figures:

Figure 1: Start of the setup program for installation of the PowerSys ----------------------------------------------------- 4
Figure 2: PowerSysWin2000 service program -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Figure 3: Functions of the PowerSys buttons --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Figure 4: Selection of the program language --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Figure 5: The create system log function -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Figure 6: Configuration of the serial interface from the Service PC------------------------------------------------------- 7
Figure 7: Configuration for the TCP/IP connection-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Figure 8: The PowerSys menu--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Figure 9: Display of the print preview ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Figure 10: Saving the print preview in a file------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
Figure 11: Selecting a file for the export from the firmware (example package 58)--------------------------------------- 9
Figure 12: The "Data source" menu --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Figure 13: Loading the data from an existing file-----------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Figure 14: Release selection -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Figure 15: Defining a new database --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Figure 16: Window for establishing a remote connection--------------------------------------------------------------------12
Figure 17: Menu for Firmware Release download and Dongle Upgrade--------------------------------------------------12
Figure 18: The menu Firmware Dongle Upgrade-----------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Figure 19: Selecting the dongle file by entering the name -------------------------------------------------------------------13
Figure 20: Opening the dongle file with the browser function---------------------------------------------------------------14
Figure 21: Example of an loaded PowerLink device configuration---------------------------------------------------------15
Figure 22: The PowerSys form commands -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Figure 23: The event recorder in the PowerSys service program ------------------- Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.
Figure 24: Entries in the event recorder------------------------------------------------ Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.
Figure 25: Starting the MemTool installation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------21
Figure 26: Starting the MemTool program ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------22
Figure 27: Target selection-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------22
Figure 28: MemTool general settings-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------23
Figure 29: Target Setup ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------23
Figure 30: Setup Mapping--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------23
Figure 31: Setup Program--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------24
Figure 32: Setup Verify -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------24
Figure 33: Copy of the AllInOne*.jnk files from the firmware folder to the Memtool targets---------------------------25
Figure 34: The CSP board -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------26
Figure 35: Memtool with the PowerLink target -------------------------------------------------------------------------------27
Figure 36: Selecting the Siemens PowerLink-CSP target --------------------------------------------------------------------27
Figure 37: Display after the connection to the PowerLink has been established -----------------------------------------28
Figure 38: Selection of the AllInOne files --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------28
Figure 39: Display of the sections in the list box after the Add Select has been executed -------------------------------29
Figure 40: Starting of the programming process------------------------------------------------------------------------------29
Figure 41: Display after a successful programming --------------------------------------------------------------------------30
Figure 42: Starting the firmware download------------------------------------------------------------------------------------31
Figure 43: Display of the PowerSys FW Release------------------------------------------------------------------------------31
Figure 44: The vMUX board -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------32
Figure 45: Memtool with the vMUX target-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------33
Figure 46: Selecting the Siemens PowerLink-vMUX target------------------------------------------------------------------33
Figure 47: Display after the connection to the vMUX has been established-----------------------------------------------34
Figure 48: Example for selection of the AllInOne files -----------------------------------------------------------------------34
Figure 49: Display of the sections in the list box after the Add Select has been executed -------------------------------35
Figure 50: Starting of the programming process------------------------------------------------------------------------------35
Figure 51: Display after a successful programming --------------------------------------------------------------------------36
Figure 52: Starting the firmware download------------------------------------------------------------------------------------37
Figure 53: Display of the PowerSys FW Release------------------------------------------------------------------------------37
Figure 54: Position of the jumpers on the PU3 module ----------------------------------------------------------------------38
Figure 55: Start up from Memtool program with the target Siemens SWT 3000-Pu3 ------------------------------------39
Figure 56: Selecting the target file Siemens SWT 3000-PU3 ----------------------------------------------------------------39
Figure 57: Display of the selected FLASH module after connection of a SWT 3000 -------------------------------------40

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 45


Chapter 3: Service program PowerSys SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Figure 58: Display after loading the AllInOne_PU3_*.jnk file -------------------------------------------------------------40


Figure 59: Display of the sections in the list box after the Add Select has been executed -------------------------------41
Figure 60: The Memtool programming progress------------------------------------------------------------------------------41
Figure 61: Display of the successful FLASH programming -----------------------------------------------------------------42
Figure 62: Display of the PowerSys FW Release------------------------------------------------------------------------------42
Figure 63: Display in case no connection to the target device is established ---------------------------------------------43

List of tables:

Table 1: Functions of the PowerSys menu--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8


Table 2: Functions of the data source menu------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Table 3: Fixed entries in the event recorder------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19
Table 4: Group numbers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19
Table 5: Functions of the PU3 jumpers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------38

Page - 46 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Chapter 4: Interface Modules

Description of operation 3

Slot and module identifier 7

Signal detection 8

Signal output 9

Block diagrams 12

Technical data 15
Interface Modules SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Contents:

The interface modules IFC ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3


General: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
Exclusively analog transmission interface or analog secondary path:--------------------------------------------------- 3
Exclusively digital interfaces: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
Description of operation:--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Connection principle----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Controller -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Test input--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Displays ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Slot and module identifier-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Signal acquisition through the binary inputs---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Signal output from the IFC-D/P module --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Signal output from module IFC-S----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Connection of the IFC modules -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Block diagrams of the IFC modules -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Technical data for modules IFC-D/IFC-P/IFC-S----------------------------------------------------------------------------15
Supply voltages-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------15
Working temperature range-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------15
Internal interface IFC bus -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------15
Binary inputs IFC-D/IFC-P -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Relay IFC-D/IFC-S --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Relay IFC-P-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Mechanical data IFC-D/IFC-P/IFC-S -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Index:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17
Appendix ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18
List of figures: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18

Page - 2 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Interface Modules

The interface modules IFC

General:
The interface module IFC is used for communication between protection equipment and the
SWT 3000. The following versions are available:
z Module IFC-D for Interface Command Direct tripping
z Module IFC-P Normal version (Interface Command Permissive tripping)
z Module IFC-S Signaling (Interface Command Signaling)

Exclusively analog transmission interface or analog secondary path:

Modules IFC-D and IFC-P are inserted at slot IFC./1 (directly next to the PU3) in the subrack. Slot
IFC./2 is provided for inserting module IFC-S. It is also possible to equip this slot with an additional
module IFC-P or IFC-D. In this case the output relays of the module at slot IFC./2 are used for con-
tact doubling, while the inputs are not used.

Exclusively digital interfaces:

Modules IFC-D and IFC-P are inserted at slot IFC./1 (directly next to the PU3) in the subrack. Slot
IFC./2 is provided for inserting module IFC-S, or for an additional IFC-P or IFC-D module. If an IFC-
P or IFC-D is inserted then 8 inputs and outputs are available (in operating mode 5D).

Description of operation:

IFC-D: The module IFC-D has four binary inputs for receiving contact information
from the protection devices. Up to four circuit breaker coils can also be
operated with this module. It is thus possible to implement the trigger
commands directly from a distant station, i.e. without a protection device.
This module is preferred used for direct tripping mode but the use in pro-
tection systems with permissive tripping is also possible.
IFC-P: The module IFC-P is preferred used in protection systems with permis-
sive tripping. When observing the max. switching current of the relays di-
rect tripping of circuit breaker coils is also possible (ref. to technical data).
There are similarly four binary inputs and four command contact outputs
available. The contact rating of the output relays is lower compared to the
IFC-D module but operating times are significantly shorter. Modules IFC-
D and IFC-P are pin-compatible.
IFC-S: Module IFC-S is used for signaling of commands that are acquired (bi-
nary inputs) or output (relay outputs) by modules IFC-D and IFC-P.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 3


Interface Modules SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Connection principle

IFC-D/P BI 1
PR U = 24...250 V
F 3A1 X43 X44 X45

X55 *)

4A1

Inputs 2 - 4

*) Setting the rated voltage 24, 48/60, 110, 250 V


IFC-D/P BI1 IFC binary input 1
PR Protection relay contact
3A1 4A1 Terminals binary input 1
F Fuse

Figure 1: Basic connection of the IFC-D or IFC-P modules.

Page - 4 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Interface Modules

S1

Figure 2: The IFC-P module

IFC-[ x] PU3
BE1...4 BE1...4_I Controller
MUX
Controller
BE1...4
BE1...4_T
Test

MSV 4 Signal

Slot
Slot rec.

Type
Type rec.

TPibus
BA1...8 BA1_...BA8_A

P12_R_ON
Signal
P12_R
P5
ISV_IFC
P12_R GND

MSV4 Modular terminal block Slot rec. Slot recognition


Tpibus Internal bus Type rec. Type recognition
MUX Multiplexer ISV_IFC Internal power supply IFC
P12_R 12 V supply for relais P12_R_ON 12V supply available
P5 5 V supply

Figure 3: Block diagram of the IFC modules

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 5


Interface Modules SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Controller

A controller is used on all interface modules for the following functions:


z Control of the data traffic from/to the PU3
z Sampling the signal inputs 1 to 4 and triggering an interrupt at the PU3 in case of
changes.
z Switching the command relays via the signal outputs.
z Supervision functions
The controller is connected to the PU3 controller via an internal bus.

Test input

Commands can be entered for each input in test operation by means of the DIL switches S1.1 to
S1.4. Switchover from normal to test mode is effected with the service program SysWin 2000 under
SWT 3000 <System-2 configuration>.

Figure 4: The <System-2 configuration> tab

For security reasons the controller signals all inputs as “off“ after switching over to test mode re-
gardless of the actual switch position. The “on” state can only be reached by switching from posi-
tion “off” to “on”. All switches must be in the “off“ position beforehand.

Displays

The activated output relays are displayed with LEDs H1 to H4 (green), and the activated binary
inputs with LEDs H5 to H8 (green).

Page - 6 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Interface Modules

Slot and module identifier

An existing IFC module and its slot address are automatically recognized by the PU3 in the
SWT 3000 system.
A suitably configured ribbon cable. must be used for the slot identification function.

IFC-[x]-2 IFC-[x]-1 PU3


P5 P5

IFC_SLOT IFC_SLOT
IFC Controller IFC Controller

X41/1 X41/1
IFC_SLOT_N IFC_SLOT_N GND

*)

Figure 5: Principle of slot identification in the SWT 3000 system

Connection 1 to slot 2 is disconnected with the ribbon cable used.


26
IFC-2 IFC-1 PU3

*)
1

*) Connection 1 to module slot 2 is disconnected

Figure 6: Ribbon cable for connecting the IFC modules to the PU3

The module type is recognized by the IFC controller through the different equipment of the mod-
ules and this is signaled to the PU3.

IFC-[x]-2 IFC-[x]-1 PU3

CON CON PU3CON

P5 P5

TYPE TYPE

Option TPibus

Figure 7: Type identifier of the IFC modules.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 7


Interface Modules SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Signal acquisition through the binary inputs

If a message is detected by the binary inputs (BE1...BE4) of the module (edge change) an inter-
rupt request is sent to the PU3. The IFC module is connected to the PU3 by a ribbon cable via con-
nector X3 at the front. If an interrupt is detected by the PU3 the status of the binary inputs can be
read by the PU3 via lines DIF0...DIF3.
In order to suppress interference pulses a signal must be applied to the binary input for at least
1 ms before the interrupt request is sent. The following figure shows the block diagram of a binary
input.

1 2 3 4
Figure 8: Binary inputs of modules IFC-D and IFC-P

Each of the binary inputs contains the following components:

1 Protective circuit
2 Setting of the input rated voltage
3 Rectifier
4 Optocoupler
1: The required security against destruction and interference is provided by the protec-
tive circuit.

2: The input rated voltage can be set to the values 24V, 48/60V, 110V and 250 V DC
with the links X43...X58. The operating point is at 80% of the selected voltage (the
link settings can be found in Chapter 2).

3: Rectification ensures that the input signal is polarity-neutral.

4: The optocoupler isolates the input circuit electrically from the electronic system

Page - 8 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Interface Modules

Signal output from the IFC-D/P module

Commands from the distant station are output through relays K1...K4 in the case of module IFC-D
and relays K13...K16 in the case of module IFC-P. Compared with module IFC-P the relays of
module IFC-D are slower but they can switch more power. With module IFC-D power circuit break-
ers can be operated directly.

P12_R

D0 K1/K13 GND
D4

D1 K2/K14 GND
D5

D2 K3/K15 GND
D6

D3 K4/K16 GND
D7
K1 - K4 Output relays of module IFC-D
K13 - K16 Output relays of module IFC-P
D0 - D7 Operation of the IFCx controller

Figure 9: Block diagram of the output circuit of IFC-D/P

The following security systems are incorporated for sending commands without interference:
 The power supply voltage P12_R must be enabled by the PU3 .
 The relays are operated on a two-pole basis

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 9


Interface Modules SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Signal output from module IFC-S

The messages are transmitted through relays K5...K12. These relays are identical with those on
module IFC-D. If there are seven relays one changeover contact per relay is brought out. The con-
tact of relay K5 can be used as a make contact or break contact by means of jumper X42. All eight
signal relay contacts have a joint root (3A1).
The excitation voltage P12_R of the relay coils must be enabled by the PU3.

P12_R

D0 K5 GND

D1 K6 GND

D7 K12 GND
K5 - K12 Output relays of module IFC-S
D0 - D7 Operation of the IFCx controller

Figure 10: Block diagram of the output circuit of IFC-S

Page - 10 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Interface Modules

Connection of the IFC modules

The interface module IFC must be connected from the protective relay via the modular terminal
block X1 (conductor cross-section 1,5 mm2). The terminal assignment can be seen in the following
drawing.

IFC-D/P IFC-S

1 3
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 K5 K6 K8 K7

4A
2 4
1 3

3A CR

2 4
1 3

2A

2 4
1 3

1A
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 K9 K10 K11 K12
2 4
1A to 4A Modular terminal block BI1 - 4 Binary inputs 1 to 4
IFC-D/P IFC-D or IFC-P module CO1 - 4 Command outputs 1 to 4
IFC-S IFC-S module K5 - K12 Signaling relays
CR Joint root of relays K5 - K12

Figure 11: Terminal assignment of the IFC modules

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 11


Interface Modules SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Block diagrams of the IFC modules


X1

X55 X45 X44 X43


VCC 3A1

BI1
1 Controller MUX 4A1
2 P12_R
3 S1_1
4 H5
5 VCC X56 X48 X47 X46
6 Test
7 3A2
8
9 BI2
10
11 4A2
12
13 S1_2
14 H6
15 X57 X51 X50 X49
16 Test
17 3A3
18
19 BI3
20
21 4A3
22
23 S1_3
24 H7
25 X58 X54 X53 X52
26 Test
3A4

X41 BI4
4A4
S1_4
H8
Test

P12_R
D0 D0
X20
D1 1A1
D2
D3 K1
D4
X19
D5 D4 2A1
D6
D7
P12_R
P12_R_ON D1
H1 X23
1A2

K2
H2
X22
D5 2A2
H3

H4 P12_R
VCC D2
P12_R X26
1A3

IFC P12_R K3
ISV
X25
D6 2A3

P12_R
D3
X29
1A4

K4

D7 X28
2A4

Figure 12: Block diagram of the IFC-D module

Page - 12 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Interface Modules

X1

X55 X45 X44 X43


VCC 3A1

BI1
1 Controller MUX 4A1
2 P12_R
3 S1_1
4 H5
5 VCC X56 X48 X47 X46
6 Test
7 3A2
8
9 BI2
10
11 4A2
12
13 S1_2
14 H6
15 X57 X51 X50 X49
16 Test
17 3A3
18
19 BI3
20
21 4A3
22
23 S1_3
24 H7
25 X58 X54 X53 X52
26 Test
3A4

X41 BI4
4A4
S1_4
H8
Test

P12_R
D0 D0
X20
D1 1A1
D2
D3 K13
D4
X19
D5 D4 2A1
D6
D7
P12_R
P12_R_ON D1
H1 X23
1A2

K14
H2
X22
D5 2A2
H3

H4 P12_R
D2
P12_R VCC X26
1A3

IFC P12_R
K15
ISV
X25
D6 2A3

P12_R
D3
X29
1A4

K16

D7 X28
2A4

Figure 13: Block diagram of the IFC-P module

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 13


Interface Modules SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

VCC

1 Controller MUX
2 P12_R
3
4 H5
5 VCC P12_1
6 X1
7 K9
8
9 D4 X19
10 1A1
11
X20
12 2A1
13
14 H6
15 P12_1
16 K10
17
18
19 D5 X22
20 1A2
21 X23
22 2A2
23
24 H7 P12_1
25
26 K11

D6 X25 1A3
X41
X26
2A3

H8 P12_1
K12

D7 X28
1A4
X29
2A4
D0 X17
D1 P12_1 3A1
D2 K5
D3
D4 D0 X42
1 2 3
D5
D6
D7 X15
4A1

P12_R_ON P12_1
H1 K6

D1 X13
H2 3A2
X14
4A2
H3 P12_1
K7
H4
P12_R VCC D2 X11
3A4
X12
4A4
IFC P12_R
ISV P12_1
K8

D3 X9
3A3
X10
4A3

Figure 14: Block diagram of the IFC-S module

Page - 14 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Interface Modules

Technical data for modules IFC-D/IFC-P/IFC-S

Supply voltages
5 V DC ± 5 %
12 V DC ± 5 %
for all modules

Current input (4 relays on) IFC-D


Supply voltage 5V: 60 mA
Supply voltage 12V: 4x16 = 64 mA

Power consumption (4 relays on) IFC-D


Supply voltage 5V: typ. 0.3 W
Supply voltage 12V: typ. 0.8 W

Current input (4 relays on) IFC-P


Supply voltage 5V: 60 mA
Supply voltage 12V: 4x56 = 224 mA

Power consumption (4 relays on) IFC-P


Supply voltage 5V: typ. 0.3 W
Supply voltage 12V: typ. 2.7 W

Current input (8 relays on) IFC-S


Supply voltage 5V: 60 mA
Supply voltage 12V: 8x16 = 128 mA

Power consumption (8 relays on) IFC-S


Supply voltage 5V: typ. 0.3 W
Supply voltage 12V: typ. 1.5 W

Working temperature range


-5 ... +55 °C

Internal interface IFC bus


Signal level: TTL

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 15


Interface Modules SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Binary inputs IFC-D/IFC-P

Input protection by means of suppressor diodes


in case of interference impulses of: > 400 V

Input voltage range 24 V DC


48/60 V DC
110 V DC
250 V DC

Rectifier for purpose of neutral polarity

Electrical isolation by means of optocoupler

Low-pass filter for suppressing spurious pulses


Duration: < 1 ms

Relay IFC-D/IFC-S

Contact: 1 make contact, 1 break contact

Contact material: Silver, gold-flashed

Switching capacity ON: 1250 VA/


OFF: 30 VA/

Continuous current rating: 5A


Current for 0.5 s: 26 A
Pick-up time including relay chatter time approx.: 5 ms
Electric strength of contacts /coil: 3000 Vrms

Relay IFC-P
Contact: simple make contact
Contact material: ruthenium
Switching power max.: 250 W
Switching current max.: 5 A DC
Switching voltage max.: 250 V DC
Pick-up time including contact chatter time max.: 2 ms
Electric strength of contacts/coil: 6000 Vrms

Mechanical data IFC-D/IFC-P/IFC-S

Dimensions of the modules :


PC board: Ordinary European standard format
Installation width: 2 depth units

Connecting elements:
Internal interface "IFC" bus,
Plug X3: 26-contact plug connector

Page - 16 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Interface Modules

Index:

B M

Block diagram 5 Modular terminal block 11


Block diagrams 12 Module type 7
IFC-D module 12
IFC-P module 13
IFC-S module 14 P

Protective circuit 8
C

Connection 11 R
Controller 6
Ribbon cable 7

D
S
Description of operation 3
Signal acquisition 8
Signal output 9
I Signaling 3
Slot address 7
IFC-D 3, 9 Supply voltages 15
IFC-P 3, 9
IFC-S 3, 10
Input rated voltage 8 T

Terminal assignment 11
Test input 6

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 17


Interface Modules SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Appendix

List of figures:

Figure 1: Basic connection of the IFC-D or IFC-P modules. --------------------------------------------------------------- 4


Figure 2: The IFC-P module ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Figure 3: Block diagram of the IFC modules---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Figure 4: The <System-2 configuration> tab --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Figure 5: Principle of slot identification in the SWT 3000 system---------------------------------------------------------- 7
Figure 6: Ribbon cable for connecting the IFC modules to the PU3------------------------------------------------------- 7
Figure 7: Type identifier of the IFC modules. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Figure 8: Binary inputs of modules IFC-D and IFC-P----------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Figure 9: Block diagram of the output circuit of IFC-D/P ------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
Figure 10: Block diagram of the output circuit of IFC-S---------------------------------------------------------------------10
Figure 11: Terminal assignment of the IFC modules ------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Figure 12: Block diagram of the IFC-D module-------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Figure 13: Block diagram of the IFC-P module -------------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Figure 14: Block diagram of the IFC-S module -------------------------------------------------------------------------------14

Page - 18 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Chapter 5: PU3f Module

Functions of the PU3f 3

Description of operation 6

Digital line equipment 13


PU3 Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Contents:

Functions of the PU3f module---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3


Mode of operation of the PU3f --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Internal power supply------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Controller -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
The analog line interface (LIA) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Self-test----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Control and display elements of the PU3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Significance of the LEDs on the PU3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
Service interface------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Operating mode as stand-alone SWT 3000 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
Operating mode as integrated SWT 3000 (iSWT) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Interference level evaluation----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Event memory and real-time clock --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Clock synchronisation -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Line clock synchronisation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
The digital line equipment DLE ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Transmission concept------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Line interface X.21 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14
Line interface G703.1 (64 kbit/s) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------15
Line interface G703.6 (2Mbit/s HDB3) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Jumper settings -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Index: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17
Appendix: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18
List of figures ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18
List of tables ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18

Page - 2 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual PU3 Module

Functions of the PU3f module


The PU3f (Processing Unit) is the central control module of the SWT 3000 unit. At the transmit
end it converts protection commands that are received via an interface module IFC-D or IFC-P into
tones of a defined frequency. If the PU3 is housed in a remote (stand-alone) SWT 3000 unit these
are transmitted either via a copper line equipment module CLE on a cable link to the distant station
or to the interface module of a PLC unit. From there they are further transmitted via a high-voltage
line to the distant station.
It is also possible to connect the serial synchronous interface (SSI) of the PU3f module via a fibre
optic module (FOM) digital to the PowerLink PLC system or to an other SWT 3000 system.

SWT3000
PU3f

FOM
SSI FO
VF CLE
LIA VF
IFC-1

DLE
IFC-2 LID-1 X.21/G703.1/G703.6

LID-2 X.21/G703.1/G703.6

ALRS
SV-1

SV-2

PU3f Processor unit CLE Copper line equipment


IFC Interface module ALRS Alarm relay module
SV Power supply LIA Line interface analog
DLE Interface module to digital LID Line interface digital
transmission paths VF Voice frequency
FOM Fibre optic modem SSI Serial synchronous interface

Figure 1: Block diagram of the SWT 3000 unit

The PU3 module can be expanded optionally by a submodule DLE for digital transmission paths
accommodating two digital line interfaces LID-1 and LID-2. These are used for transmitting the pro-
tection commands over a digital network (SDH/PDH). The LID can be connected also via a FOM
module and a FOBox to a multiplexer system.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 3


PU3 Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

If the PU3 and the IFC modules are integrated in the PowerLink unit the frequencies are for-
warded to the CSP module via the SSI.

PowerLink
CSP

Service PC

iSWT3000
PU3f

SSI
LIA
IFC-1 LAN

LID-1 X.21/G703.1/G703.6

IFC-2 DLE
LID-2 X.21/G703.1/G703.6

PS

Option

PU3f Processor module CSP Central signal processing module


IFC Interface module LID Line interface digital
PS Power supply DLE Interface module to digital
transmission paths

Figure 2: Block diagram of the SWT 3000 unit integrated in the PowerLink.

At the receive end the incoming commands are received in the VF range resp. digital depending
on the operating mode, converted into ”binary” protection commands and forwarded to the IFC-D/P
module for command output.
Apart from coding and decoding of protection commands the PU3f also performs various moni-
toring functions. For example, the receive and transmit levels are fed via measuring points to the
PU3f where they are compared with the permissible values. If these levels are not reached the
PU3f activates an alarm. In the normal situation, i.e. if there is no protection command to be trans-
mitted the guard signal is sent to the distant station.
Loss of a wanted signal (command or guard tone) triggers an alarm at the receive end and
causes the relay outputs of the device to block. This alarm state can only be cancelled by receiving
the guard signal again.

Page - 4 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual PU3 Module

When the unit is started a self-test is carried out. A watchdog also monitors the functionability of
the internal digital signal processor (DSP). In the event of malfunctions the transmitter output and
the relay outputs of the unit are blocked. An overview of the functional units of the PU3f is shown in
the following diagram.

PU3f SSI
LIA CSP
PU3 D FOM
ISV DSP
VF
A CLE

IFC-D/P

Controller

ALRS

CSP

LID-1 X.21/G703.1/G703.6
DLE
X.21/G703.1/G703.6
LID-2
optional

PU3f Processor and analysis module CSP Central signal processing


IFC-x Interface module FOM Fibre optic modem
iSV Internal power supply CLE Copper line equipment
DLE Interface module to digital LID-x Line interface digital
transmission paths DSP Digital signal processor

Figure 3: Functional units of the PU3 module

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 5


PU3 Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Mode of operation of the PU3f


The processor and analysis module PU3 can be divided into the functional units internal power
supply, analog line interfaces (LIA) with digital signal processor (DSP), Controller and digital line
unit (DLE) which intercommunicate via an interface.

Internal power supply

The internal power supply generates the voltages needed on the module that are not fed exter-
nally:
z Power supply voltages for the analog line interface
z Switched 12 V supply voltage for the relays on the IFC modules.
The 12 V operating voltage for the IFC modules can be switched from the controller and allows
selective disabling of the output relays. The operating voltages on the module are monitored. Loss
of a voltage generates a reset and alarm on the module.

Controller

The controller is the central element of the PU3. It directs communication with the analog line in-
terface, the digital line unit, the service interface for the service PC, the LAN or the alarm interface.
Equipment variants and user data can be loaded via the service interface or via the LAN interface.
The possible equipment variants for the DSP are administered by the SysWin service program.
The controller carries out the entire administration of memory space. The following memory chips
are available:
z EEPROM for user data
z SRAM for event memory and working memory
z FPROM for program memory
The controller also implements the data exchange in the transmit and receive direction with the in-
terface module IFC-D/P and IFC-S. Data from the IFC module is fed via an input buffer into a regis-
ter where it is read by the controller per interrupt. Data relating to the IFC module is also written by
the controller into this register per interrupt and reaches the IFC module via an output buffer.
If an error is detected in the SWT 3000 a message to this effect is output via an interface to the
alarm module ALRS. The ALRS is, however, only present in the stand-alone version of the
SWT 3000 unit. If the PU3f is in the PowerLink the alarms are forwarded to the CSP and the alarm
is output on the ALRS module of the PowerLink.

The analog line interface (LIA)

The LIA sets up to the connection of the module to the analog protection command transmission
and consists of a digital signal processor (DSP), operational amplifiers and analog switches.
The DSP generates the necessary command frequencies and communicates with the transmis-
sion interfaces. Depending on the equipment variant these are the interfaces to the IF and RF
modules, or to the copper line equipment CLE.
The command frequencies in the VF or IF1 range are also generated by the DSP accordingly.
Analog switches are used for switching over between VF and IF signal path. The switchover proc-
ess is controlled by the PU3 controller. All necessary information is loaded with the equipment vari-
ant via the service program and written into the DSP by the controller via an interface. During op-
eration this interface is used to transmit protection commands and parameters. The controller can
read and write DSP memory cells, and can also transfer commands and trigger various interrupts.

Page - 6 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual PU3 Module

The controller triggers an interrupt in the DSP for the transmission of outgoing protection com-
mands. For the receiving of incoming protection commands the DSP triggers an interrupt in the
controller. The controller continuously monitors the functionability of the DSP by means of a watch-
dog function.

Self-test

The self-test functions are executed in the "self-test" phase after every program restart. In the
event of a fault it enables the fault to be reliably pinpointed at module level. The following tests are
performed in the self-test:
 Checking the program and data memory of controller and DSP for functionability
 Checking of configuration and parameter data for plausibility
 Checking the interface(s) and communication between controller and DSP
 Checking the controller-IFC module interface
 Checking the interfaces to the CLE (as far as possible)
If a fault is detected in the self-test phase all inputs and outputs of the interface modules are dis-
connected and the corresponding alarms activated (LED, relays). The internal alarm trace can be
interrogated with the service program via the service interface.

Control and display elements of the PU3

Control and display elements are mounted on the module. Some are covered by the front panel:

SIEMENS >

SWT 3000 >

LID2 LID1 Tx-AL Tx-AL

OK LIA Rx-AL Rx-AL

SNR Tx

Rx

PU3 Module

Figure 4: Front panel of a unit with analog line interface CLE and FOM module

z The On/Off switch for the power supply is covered by the front panel in order to pre-
vent the unit being accidentally disconnected.

z The PU3 controller and hence the entire SWT 3000 unit is reset with the Reset but-
ton which is also covered.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 7


PU3 Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Significance of the LEDs on the PU3

z The 2-color LED LIA is needed for displaying the status of the analog line interface
LIA. The following states can be displayed:

Table 1: Significance of the LED LIA displays


State Significance
off LIA not configured
red static LIA is not ready for operation
red flashing LIA is only operational to a limited extent (e.g. receive alarm)
green static LIA functioning correctly
green flashing Test operation or secondary path

z The 2-color LED LID-1 is used for displaying the status of the digital line interface
LID-1. The following states can be displayed:

Table 2: Significance of the LED LID-1 displays


State Significance
off LID-1 not configured
red static LID-1 is not ready for operation
red flashing LID-1 is only operational to a limited extent (e.g. receive alarm)
green static LID-1 functioning correctly
green flashing Test operation or secondary path

z The 2-color LED LID-2 is used for displaying the status of the digital line interface
LID-2. The following states can be displayed:

Table 3: Significance of the LED LID-2 displays


State Significance
off LID-2 not configured
red static LID-2 is not ready for operation
red flashing LID-2 is only operational to a limited extent (e.g. receive alarm)
green static LID-2 functioning correctly
green flashing Test operation or secondary path
z The 2-color LED OK/BGAL is needed for displaying the PU3 module status. The fol-
lowing states can be displayed:

Table 4: Significance of the LED OK/BGAL displays


State Significance
off Power Supply disconnected or faulty
red static Module is not ready for operation
red flashing General alarm module is only operational to a limited extent
green static Normal operation
green flashing Test operation

Page - 8 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual PU3 Module

Service interface

An RS232 service interface in the form of a 9-pole Sub-D socket is fitted at the PU3 for connect-
ing a service PC. The pin assignment is shown in the following drawing.

PU Schnittstelle COMx
PC
Verbindungskabel
Frontplatte
(9-pol.) (9-pol.)
RD (2) (2) RD
TD (3) (3) TD
SG (5) (5) SG
DCD (1) (1) DCD
DTR (4) (4) DTR
DSR (6) (6) DSR
RTS (7) (7) RTS
CTS (8) (8) CTS

Legend: Schnittstelle Frontplatte (9-Pol) Interface front panel (9-contact)


Verbindungskabel Connecting cable
Figure 5: in assignment of the RS232 service interface

The service interface is operated as a user interface with the "stand-alone" SWT 3000 unit and as
an internal interface to the CSP when the SWT 3000 is used in the PowerLink system (iSWT). The
selection is made through the device configuration.

Operating mode as stand-alone SWT 3000

The service interface is fed optionally to the Sub-D jack on the front panel or on the backplane.
A Busy detection circuit automatically switches over to the front panel interface if a PC is con-
nected there.

Operating mode as integrated SWT 3000 (iSWT)

In this operating mode the service interface is connected to the controller of the CSP module
(central signal processing) of the PowerLink unit via the LAN (local area network). The user service
interface is located on the CSP from where the parameters of the PU3f module are also set. The
plug on the front panel of the PU3f is not used and is covered.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 9


PU3 Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Interference level evaluation

The function of interference level evaluation is to record the level of interference signals applied
for a long time and superimposed on the wanted signal. The interference level alarm (SNALR) is
signaled if a fixed level threshold is exceeded. In the "Switching functions" mode the interference
level evaluation is only activated if a single tone is transmitted (guard or command tone). If the
SWT unit is integrated in the ESB 2000i the signals SWT-SNALR and ESB-SNALR are linked in
the central control module ZST.

Event memory and real-time clock

Protection commands and alarms are provided with time and date and a registration number be-
fore they are entered in the event memory. They are read out by the service PC and this is also
possible from the distant station by means of remote maintenance. The following events are en-
tered:
 Incoming protection commands from IFC-D/P,
 Outgoing protection commands to the IFC-D/P,
 Detected alarms,
 Program restart.
 Changing date and/or time
 Changing the configuration
In case of an overflow the oldest entry in the event memory is overwritten. For more information
about the event memory refer to the service program description in chapter 3!

Clock synchronisation

The system-internal clock can be synchronized by an external clock. The clock synchronisation
input (USYNC) on the module ALRS (terminal a1/c3) is provided for this. The operating point of the
input voltage can be set between 15V (strap x3 (1-2)) and approx. 54V (strap X3 (2-3)) (see also
connection of the ALRS module).

Figure 6: Options for the SWT 3000 clock synchronisation

Page - 10 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual PU3 Module

The setting options for the local sync are described in the table below.
Table 5: Setting options for the local clock synchronisation of the iSWT
Adjustment local sync Remarks

OFF No local clock synchronisation

USYNC signal (minute or hour) An external impulse is received via the USYNC input every min-
ute resp. hour. The active signal slope rising or falling is syn-
chronising the RTC seconds.

IRIG-B00x (sync only) The IRIG-B message is received via the USYNC input and de-
coded. With each change of the IRIG-B minutes the RTC sec-
onds are synchronised

IRIG-B000 (RTC time adj.) The IRIG-B message is received via the USYNC input and de-
coded. With each change of the IRIG-B minutes the RTC sec-
onds are synchronised. Additional the IRIG-B-time (hour, min-
utes, seconds) is compared with the RTC time of the iSWT. In
case of a difference the IRIG-B values are taken over into the
RTC.

IRIG-B004 (RTC(time&date adj.) The IRIG-B message is received via the USYNC input and de-
coded. With each change of the IRIG-B minutes the RTC sec-
onds are synchronised. Additional the IRIG-B-time & date is
compared with the RTC time & date of the iSWT. In case of a
difference the IRIG-B values are taken over into the RTC.

NTP-Sync Synchronisation of the RTC with the network time protocol. This
function requires additional a SNMP Server V1.32 or higher

In case of using IRIG-B sync:


For input voltages of 5V and 12V the new alarm module ALR is required.
Otherwise the USYNC input of the ALRS module has to be adjusted to
24V and an additional level converter (TTL to 24V) is necessary.

In the configuration form for the clock synchronisation additional a non urgent alarm (NUALR) can
be activated in case of USYNC failure (see figure below).

Figure 7: Activation of NU alarm in case of USYNC failure

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 11


PU3 Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Line clock synchronisation

It is also possible to synchronize the clock through one of the devices via the connecting route
(line sync. mode <off>, <Master>, <Slave>). The device that is to perform the synchronization is
designated as the “master“ and the device to be synchronized as the “slave“ d. This means that it
is only necessary to synchronize one device (the master) externally c.
The line synchronization is performed once a day at 24:00 resp. at the time defined with <Line
sync. hour> (available from PowerSys versions ≥ P3.2.216). by transmitting the synchronizing tone
(fs). The difference in time between master and slave must not be greater than ± 30 sec otherwise
clock synchronization is not possible. The maximum difference in the time between master and
slave is thus the signal run time.
Select <Line synch.> <off> for both devices if both devices are provided with external synchroniz-
ing pulses e. In this case synchronization between the devices is not implemented.

c d

ext. sync
fs 18:00

A A
L L
(i)SWT 3000 (i)SWT 3000
R R
S S

ext. sync ext. sync

A A
L L
(i)SWT 3000 (i)SWT 3000
R R
S S

Figure 8: Possibilities for the clock synchronisation

Page - 12 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual PU3 Module

The digital line equipment DLE


The digital line interfaces LID-1 and LID-2 of the SWT 3000 system are implemented on module
DLE. These enable the protection commands (CMD) to be transmitted over a digital network
(SDH/PDH). The data for the Remote Maintenance (RM) and Service Channel (SC) interfaces and
the system-internal control information (CTRL) are transmitted additionally.
Module DLE is designed as a self-contained PC board connected electrically to the PU3 via a rib-
bon cable and mechanically via spacer sleeves. All external interfaces are routed via the PU3
module.
The following hardware interfaces are available for each LID:
z X.21 (64 kbit/s)
z G703.1 (64 kbit/s)
z G703.6 (2Mbit/s)
The LID-1 can be operated alone or the LID-1 and LID-2 jointly (for multipath transmission) on the
DLE. With multipath transmission different line interfaces can be used for LID-1 and LID-2.

Multipath transmission can also be implemented by using the analog in-


terface LIA on the PU3, and LID-1.

Transmission concept

On the DLE a data stream is generated at the transmit end from the protection commands, RM,
SC and the internal control information that is sent cyclically in 4 message types. There are split up
again at the receive end into protection commands, RM SC and control information.
The messages have the following priority among one another:
Type 3 Command information = Prio 1
Type 2 Service channel (SC)
Type 1 Remote maintenance (RM)
Type 0 Internal control information
Messages have a constant length of 40 bits and are composed as follows:
Table 6: Message structure for the digital line interfaces
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5
Frame alignment Type code 0 User data User data User data
signal
Frame alignment Type code 1 RM data RM data RM data
signal
Frame alignment Type code 2 SC data SC data SC data
signal
Frame alignment Type code 3 Device address Command informa- Check sum
signal tion

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 13


PU3 Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Line interface X.21

The X.21 interface is structured according to the RS422 standard (ITU-T V.11) and consists of the
data lines TxD and RxD and the clock lines TxC and RxC.

DTE DTE
TxD (A) RxD (A)

TxD (B) RxD (B)

RxD (A) TxD (A)

RxD (B) TxD (B)

TxC (A) RxC (A)

TxC (B) RxC (B)

RxC (A) TxC (A)

RxC (B) TxC (B)

Figure 9: Structure of the line interface X.21

The high transmission reliability of the interface is achieved by evaluating the differential voltage
between a twisted wire pair in each case. The electrical levels of the data lines are defined with
0.3 V to -6 V for “logic 1“ and with +0.3 V to +6 V for “logic 0“. The signal state is identified by the
voltage between the measuring points (A) and (B).
Terminations of 100 ohms at the receiver inputs not only prevent reflections on the transmission
line, but also contribute to transmission reliability through the resulting pronounced current.
Characteristics:
Number of signal lines: 8 (for each balanced pair for data and clock pulse, for transmit and re-
ceive direction in each case)
Levels: max. voltage of each line to GND (absolute) < 6V, differential voltage be-
tween the lines >2V
Line run: twisted in pairs and shielded, joint shield for all 4 line pairs
Bit rate: 64 kbit/s

Page - 14 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual PU3 Module

Line interface G703.1 (64 kbit/s)

Coding in accordance with G703.1 permits simultaneous transmission of the data of a 64kHz and
an 8kHz clock pulse and is carried out according to the following scheme:
1. Division of a 64kbit period into four identical intervals.
2. A binary "1" is coded as a block of four 1100.
3. A binary "0" is coded as a block of four 1010.
4. The binary signal is converted into an AMI-coded signal, with alternating polarity of
consecutive blocks of four. AMI is the abbreviation for Alternate Mark Inversion. The
code is generated from the NRZ code by representing the code elements of the logic
"1" state alternately through pulses with positive or negative voltage.
5. The change of polarity of every eighth block is suppressed for marking the octet
(8kHz clock).
The nominal data rate is 64 kbit/s. The bit rate on the line is 256 kbit/s due to the conversion of
the bits into a block of four.
Characteristics:
Number of signal lines: 4 (one balanced pair for transmit and receive direction)
Level, transmitter end: "Space" 0V+/- 0,1V, "Mark" 1V
Level, receiver end: 0...3dB
Impedance: 120 Ohm
Bit rate: 64 kbit/s (gross bit rate=4*64kBi/s=256kBit/s)
Coding: AMI

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 15


PU3 Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Line interface G703.6 (2Mbit/s HDB3)

Coding in accordance with G.703.6 is also known as HDB3-code (High Density Bipolar of or-
der 3). Longer sequences of zeros, such as can occur with the AMI code are avoided here. If there
are four consecutive binary zeros the fourth character is changed by infringement of the AMI cod-
ing regulation. This means that a maximum of three consecutive binary values of "0" can occur with
the HDB3 code. The polarity of the changed code elements alternates. The HDB3 code is one of
the voltage-free codes.

It is possible to choose between a balanced line (120 ohm) and an un-


balanced line (75 ohm, connected to GND potential). The line imped-
ances are set with links.

Characteristics:
a) Balanced line
Number of signal lines: 4 (one balanced pair each for transmit and receive direction)
Level, transmitter end: "Space" 0V+/- 0,1V, "Mark" 1V
Level, receiver end: Loss at 1.024kHz 0...6dB
Impedance: 120 ohm
b) Unbalanced line
Number of signal lines: 4 (one unbalanced line each for transmit and receive direction)
Level, transmitter end: "Space" 0V+/- 0.237V, "Mark" 2.37V
Level, receiver end: Loss at 1.024kHz 0...6dB
Impedance: 75 ohm
Line lengths: short = indoor, long = outdoor
Bit rate: 2Mbit/s
Coding: HDB3

Jumper settings

All necessary jumper settings are shown in the chapter 2 “Installation and commissioning”. They
are also available in the SWTStraps program which is automatically installed with the PowerSys
service program.

Page - 16 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual PU3 Module

Index:

IFC-D 3
IFC-P 3
A Interference level evaluation 10
iSWT settings
Alarm module 6 clock synchronisation 10
AMI 15 clock synchronisation IRIG-B 11

C L

CLE 3, 6 LED 8
Controller 6 LIA 8
LID-1 8
LID-2 8
D
OK/BGAL 8
LIA 6
Display elements 7
LID 3
DLE 3, 13
Line interface G703.1 15
DSP 6
Line interface G703.6 16
Line interface X.21 14
E line synchronization 12

Event memory 10
M

F Memory chips 6
Monitoring functions 4
Functional units 5
Functions 3
P
Receive end 4
Transmit end 3
PU3 6

G
R
Guard signal 4
Real-time clock 10

H
S
Hardware interfaces 13
Self-test 7
HDB3 16
Service interface 9
Signal processor 6
I

IF1 6

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 17


PU3 Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Appendix:

List of figures
Figure 1: Block diagram of the SWT 3000 unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Figure 2: Block diagram of the SWT 3000 unit integrated in the PowerLink. -------------------------------------------- 4
Figure 3: Functional units of the PU3 module -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Figure 4: Front panel of a unit with analog line interface CLE and FOM module -------------------------------------- 7
Figure 5: in assignment of the RS232 service interface ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Figure 6: Options for the SWT 3000 clock synchronisation ----------------------------------------------------------------10
Figure 7: Activation of NU alarm in case of USYNC failure ---------------------------------------------------------------11
Figure 8: Possibilities for the clock synchronisation ------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Figure 9: Structure of the line interface X.21 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------14

List of tables
Table 1: Significance of the LED LIA displays---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Table 2: Significance of the LED LID-1 displays------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Table 3: Significance of the LED LID-2 displays------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Table 4: Significance of the LED OK/BGAL displays-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Table 5: Setting options for the local clock synchronisation of the iSWT --------------------------------------------------11
Table 6: Message structure for the digital line interfaces --------------------------------------------------------------------13

Page - 18 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Chapter 6: CLE Module

Description of operation 3

Jumper settings 7

Connector pin assignment 8


CLE Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Table of Contents:

Description of operation----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
The receive section---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
The transmit section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Alarm displays--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
S6 control wires ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Test sockets ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6
Inhibit line-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Jumper settings --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Connector pin assignment of the CLE------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
Connecting cable to the PLC unit ESB 2000i --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Connection of an external SWT 3000 to the PowerLink 50/100------------------------------------------------------------ 9
VFx port 3----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
VFx port 4----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Index: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Appendix: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
List of figures ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
List of tables ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12

Page - 2 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual CLE Module

Description of operation
The CLE module (copper line equipment) provides the interface between an SWT 3000 unit op-
erated as a stand-alone unit and a copper transmission line. The teleprotection signal is transmitted
in the VF range from 300-4000 Hz. The following equipment configurations are possible:
z Connection of two SWT 3000 stand-alone units each containing one CLE module.
z Connection of an SWT 3000 stand-alone unit to an ESB 2000i unit. The SWT 3000
unit contains a CLE module as interface and the ESB 2000i unit an NFD module.
The S6 control wire for modules CLE and NFD makes alternate multi-purpose opera-
tion possible (AMP).
The CLE module contains two independent circuit sections:
z A transmit amplifier
z A receive filter
The CLE is connected to the PU3 module in the SWT 3000 unit. This module generates the VF
signal to be transmitted which is fed onto the transmission line by the transmit amplifier of the CLE.
In the opposite direction the VF signal is forwarded from the transmission route to the PU3 via the
receive filter.
The CLE does not have any control elements but three alarm displays and two test sockets on the
front panel. The CLE module does not generate any alarms but displays alarms generated by the
PU3.

MW

NF

Prot.

PU3

PON_PU

SAL S6

Inhibit

PU3 NF

Prot.

4000 Hz 300 Hz

EAL

S/N

SAL Transmit alarm S/N S/N alarm MW Measuring transformer


EAL Receive alarm Prot. Protection circuit S6 Control wire for alternate multi-
purpose op.

Figure 1: Block diagram of the CLE module

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 3


CLE Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

The receive section

The incoming VF signal from the copper line or from a PLC system is fed in at the receive section.
The input is protected against overvoltages up to 2kV that may be transferred to the transmission
route by coupling. The input impedance can be switched over from 600 Ω to approx. 5 kΩ.
Protective circuit HP filter passive Isolating amplifier HP filter active LP filter active

Z=600Ω
5k Ω Z=600Ω

Isolating amplifier

Figure 2: The input circuit of the CLE module Test socket

The wanted signal is then filtered out from any interference signals. The attenuation tolerance dia-
gram of a band pass filter is preset for the input filter. The pass band is from 500-4000 Hz. The
band pass filter is implemented by cascading an active low-pass and high-pass filter.
The forward amplifier can be set to 0dB/+6dB/+12dB by means of links. Greater immunity to 50
Hz interference is obtained by means of the series-connected high-pass filter.
The signal is then transferred to the PU3. The receive signal can be tapped at a test socket. The
test socket is decoupled via an isolating amplifier so that there is no interference of the wanted sig-
nal through short-circuits or insertion of signals. The same voltage level prevails at the test socket
as at the input. The settable thresholds for the level alarm relate to the input of the PU3 and not to
the input of the CLE.

The transmit section

The wanted signal supplied by the PU3 is amplified in the transmit section. There is no filtering as
there is in the receive section since the signal supplied does not have interference of this type. The
PU3 supplies a level up to +4dB. The input signal is amplified by 11 dB to the range up to +15 dB.
The signal is extracted without voltage via a transformer with winding ratios that can be set to 1:2
or 1:16 and matched to the output impedance. This can be set to 600 Ω or 5 kΩ by means of links
with the corresponding output circuit.
Amplifier +11 dB Protection circuit
c11

to the trans-
from the PU3
Z=600 Ω Z=600 Ω
mission line
5k Ω

c13

Isolating ampl.

to the measuring input RMS


of the PU3
Z=5k Ω Test socket
DC

Figure 3: Block diagram of the transmit amplifier

The output of the transmit section is again protected against any interference voltages from the
transmission path. The wanted signal can be measured via an isolating amplifier. A measuring
transformer supplies a DC voltage level that is proportional to the amplitude of the output signal to
the PU3 module for test purposes. The PU3 monitors this measured value and generates the
transmitter alarm from it. The output voltage for the 100% value is 4.5 V. A protective circuit re-
stricts this voltage to max. +5V.

Page - 4 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual CLE Module

If any faults should occur in the SWT 3000 unit errored signals must not under any circumstances
be transmitted to the distant station. For this reason the transmitter output can be short-circuited via
a relay. This relay is driven by the PU3 module (PON_PU signal) and only enabled if the unit is op-
erating properly.

Alarm displays

The alarm signals generated by the PU3 module are displayed via red LED on the front panel of
the SWT 3000. LED are provided for the following alarms:

SIEMENS >

SWT 3000 >

LID2 LID1 SAL

OK LIA EAL

S/N

CLE Module

Figure 4: Displays on the CLE module

1. Transmitter alarm SAL


2. Receiver alarm EAL
3. Signal/noise level alarm S/N
The signals are low active and are fed to the LED drive via an integrated inverter module with a
+5V supply voltage.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 5


CLE Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

S6 control wires

The CLE module contains an opt coupler for the S6 control wire. The S6 control wire is used for
disconnecting voice and data signals in a PLC system in alternate multi-purpose mode.
+5 V +12 V

S6

b23 S6

Figure 5: Block diagram of the S6 control

The circuit is driven on a low-active basis. The opt coupler is activated during transmission of pro-
tection data (S6 control wire =low).

Test sockets

The following test sockets are provided on the front panel of the CLE module:
z 1 ISEP socket for measuring the level of the receive signal
z 1 ISEP socket for measuring the level of the transmit signal
The level at the sockets is measured on a high impedance basis and corresponds to the value at
the measuring point. Incorrect operations such as short circuiting or inserting a signal (U < 5V) at
the measuring sockets does not result in interruption of teleprotection signaling.

Inhibit line

An inhibit line is routed via the CLE module which acts on the inhibit input of the power supply. If
there is no CLE module (in the case of a device with digital interfaces only) link X41 must therefore
be inserted in position 1-2 in the sub rack.

Page - 6 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual CLE Module

Jumper settings

W4
X10 1 2 X12 X11
6 R9
N2
X9 1 2

V5
W3 T1
N4 W2 R7
W1
R8
H3 X2
1

V103

V102
W8
X15 X16
H2
N3
6

R136

R125

R124
H1
T2
D1

1
W6 W5
X5 X4 X3
N5

C100
K1
W7
X13 X14

Figure 6: Position of the jumpers on the CLE module

Table 1: Jumper settings for the input and output impedance


Setting 600 Ohm >5kOhm
Input impedance W4 without W4
Output impedance W5 W6, W7, W8

Table 2: Jumper settings for the receive signal gain


Receive signal gain [dB] Jumper X2 in pos.
0 W1
+6 W2
+12 W3

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 7


CLE Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Connector pin assignment of the CLE


Table 3: Connector pin assignment of the CLE module
Pin Pin a Pin b Pin c
1 Shield GNDS GNDS
2
3 Ground GND Control wire S6 (S6AB)
4
5 Control wire S6 (S6AB_GND)
6
7 Protection receive signal A
8
9 Protection receive signal B
10
11 Protection transmit signal A
12
13 Protection transmit signal B
14
15 DC value transmit signal
16 S/N Alarm DC value transmit signal GND P5V (+5V)
17 EAL Alarm P5V (+5V)
18 P12V (+12V) M12V (-12V)
19 SAL Alarm
20 GND12 P12V (+12V)
21 INHIBIT INHIBIT
22 M12V (-12V) GND12
23 Enable transmitter output S6 control line from PU3
24 VF signal from PU3
25 VF signal from PU3 GND
26 VF signal to PU3
27 VF signal to PU3 GND Ground GND
28 S6 control wire from PU3
29
30
31 Shield GNDS Shield GNDS
32

Page - 8 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual CLE Module

Connecting cable to the PLC unit ESB 2000i

The cable connection illustrated below is needed for connecting a remote SWT 3000 to the
ESB 2000i PLC system (CLE - NFD):

CLE c11
NFD
a10
F6
c13 c10
c7 a11
F6
c9 c11

c3 a13
S6
c5 a20

a1,c1,a31,c31 a1,c1,a31,c31

F6 Protection signals
S6 Control wire to the PLC unit in alternate multi-purpose mode
NFD Interface module of the PLC unit

Figure 7: Cable connection from the CLE to the PLC unit ESB 2000i

Connection of an external SWT 3000 to the PowerLink 50/100

The connection of the CLE module from an external SWT 3000 to the SUB-D female connector of
the VFx modules is shown in the figures below. In this case the VFx ports 3 resp. 4 must be used.

VFx port 3

SWT 3000 PowerLink


CLE X1 CFS-2 VFx
P12V a18 Connector panel Port 3
SUB-D connector
S6OUT c3

S6OUT_GND c5 12 S6IN_A

GND12 a20 31 S6IN_B

F6OUT_A c11 10 4-wire input A


F6OUT_B c13 29 4-wire input B

F6IN_A c7 11 4-wire output A


F6IN_B c9 30 4-wire output B

Figure 8: Connecting an external SWT 3000 to the port 3 of the VFx modules

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 9


CLE Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

VFx port 4

SWT 3000 PowerLink


CLE X1 CFS-2 VFx
P12V a18 Connector panel Port 4
SUB-D connector
S6OUT c3

S6OUT_GND c5 19 S6IN_A

GND12 a20 37 S6IN_B

F6OUT_A c11 14 4-wire input A


F6OUT_B c13 33 4-wire input B

F6IN_A c7 15 4-wire output A


F6IN_B c9 34 4-wire output B

Figure 9: Connecting an external SWT 3000 to the port 4 of the VFx modules

Page - 10 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual CLE Module

Index:

A M

Alarm displays · 3, 5 Measuring socket · 4


Multi-purpose · 3
B
O
Block diagram · 3
Output impedance · 4
C
P
Copper line equipment · 3
Pass band · 4
E
R
EAL · 5
Equipment configurations · 3 Receive section · 4
Receiver alarm · 5
F
S
Forward amplifier · 4
S/NAL · 5
S6 · 3
I S6 control wires · 6
SAL · 5
Inhibit line · 6 Signal/noise level alarm · 5
Input circuit · 4
Input impedance · 4
Input signal · 4 T

Test sockets · 6
L Transmit section · 4
Transmitter alarm · 5
Link assignment · 7

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 11


CLE Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Appendix:

List of figures
Figure 1: Block diagram of the CLE module ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Figure 2: The input circuit of the CLE module-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Figure 3: Block diagram of the transmit amplifier --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Figure 4: Displays on the CLE module----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Figure 5: Block diagram of the S6 control------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Figure 6: Position of the jumpers on the CLE module----------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Figure 7: Cable connection from the CLE to the PLC unit ESB 2000i----------------------------------------------------- 9
Figure 8: Connecting an external SWT 3000 to the port 3 of the VFx modules------------------------------------------- 9
Figure 9: Connecting an external SWT 3000 to the port 4 of the VFx modules------------------------------------------10

List of tables
Table 1: Jumper settings for the input and output impedance ---------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Table 2: Jumper settings for the receive signal gain --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Table 3: Connector pin assignment of the CLE module ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

Page - 12 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Chapter 7: The Alarm Modules ALRS and ALR

Function of the ALRS 3

Jumper settings ALRS 5

Pin assignment ALRS 6

Function of the ALR 7

Jumper settings ALR 9

Pin assignment ALR 10


ALRS and ALR Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Table of Contents:

The ALRS module---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3


Function of the ALRS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Input and outputs------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Operating the signaling relay ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Binary input clock synchronization: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Supply voltages-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Jumper settings -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Pin assignment X1 of the ALRS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6
The ALR module ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Block diagram --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Binary inputs-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Relay outputs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Visual Indication --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Test switch S1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
ALR jumper settings----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Pin assignment X1 of the ALR -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Index: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Appendix: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
List of figures ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
List of tables ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12

Page - 2 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual ALRS and ALR Module

The ALRS module

Function of the ALRS


The alarm module ALRS is the interface between the alarm and signaling point circuits of the user
and the PU3 on the SWT 3000 unit. The ALRS is installed on a European standard-sized card to
the slide-in unit in an ES902 frame.

Input and outputs


The module has 3 relay outputs and 1 binary input.
Outputs:
c General alarm (GALR)
d Pre- alarm (NDALR)
e Receiver alarm (EALR)

Operating the signaling relay

The signaling relay is operated by the PU3 module at active low level, i.e. an alarm is applied
when the input level is 0V. The relay contacts are in the normal position (i.e. released) in the event
of an alarm so that the alarm is triggered even in the event of power failure.
Only 2 connections are brought out from the signaling relay. Using links it is possible to choose
between make and break contacts. The break contact is the default setting supplied.

X1 X1
K1
C15 + 12V X4 X5 X6
GALR

A32

GALR

C30

K2
C14 + 12V X7 X8 X9
NDALR

A28

NDALR

A25

K3
C13 + 12V X10 X11 X12
EALR

A21

EALR

C23

GALR General alarm


NDALR Pre- alarm
EALR Receive alarm

Figure 1: Block diagram of the alarm relay activation and selection of the signaling contacts

Binary input clock synchronization:

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 3


ALRS and ALR Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

A1

A14 SYNC
SYNC X3 1
2
3 C3

Figure 2: Block diagram of the binary input

The binary input is also active low. Electrical isolation is provided by means of optocouplers. The
operating point is between about 15V (0-15V “Off“ state, 20-250V “On“) and about 54V (0_50V
“Off“ state, 60-250V “On“ state) settable by a link.

Supply voltages

The ALRS module needs the following supply voltages:


+12V
+5V
In the SWT 3000 unit the power supply is generally interrupted by an inhibit line when a module is
pulled. The ALRS does not have an Inhibit line so that the equipment can also be operated for test
purposes with the module pulled.

Page - 4 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual ALRS and ALR Module

Jumper settings

V7 R17
1
N1 R16
U2 X3 V8
X2 V4 R8
V3
1 R7
U1
N2
K1 K2 K3 X1

X6 X5 X4 X9 X8 X7 X12 X11 X10

Figure 3: Position of the jumper on the ALRS

Table 1: Selection of the operating point for the ALRS input


Input Input voltage 15 V – 250V Input voltage 54V – 250V
Clock synchronization Link X3 1-2 Link X3 2-3
Table 2: Selection of the relay contacts of the ALRS outputs
Alarm relay Designation Break contact (NC) Make contact (NO)
K1 General alarm X4 - X5 X5 - X6
K2 Pre- alarm X7 - X8 X8 - X9
K3 Receiver alarm X10 - X11 X11 - X12

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 5


ALRS and ALR Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Pin assignment X1 of the ALRS


Table 3: Pin assignment of the ALRS module

PIN Signalname PIN Signalname PIN Signalname


A1 Usync Input a B1 C1
A2 B2 C2
A3 B3 C3 Usync Input b
A4 B4 C4
A5 B5 C5
A6 B6 C6
A7 B7 C7
A8 B8 C8
A9 B9 C9
A10 B10 C10
A11 B11 C11
A12 GNDS B12 GNDS C12 GNDS
A13 B13 C13 ALA1_OUT_L
A14 Usync to PU3 B14 C14 ALA2_OUT_L
A15 B15 C15 ALA3_OUT_L
A16 P5V B16 P5V C16 P5V
A17 GND B17 GND C17 GND
A18 P12V B18 P12V C18 P12V
A19 B19 C19
A20 B20 C20
A21 ALA1_A (RX_Alarm) B21 C21
A22 B22 C22
A23 B23 C23 ALA1_B (RXALR)
A24 B24 C24
A25 ALA2_B (NU_Alarm) B25 C25
A26 B26 C26
A27 B27 C27
A28 ALA2_A (NU_Alarm) B28 C28
A29 B29 C29
A30 B30 C30 ALA3_B (Gen. Alarm)
A31 B31 C31
A32 ALA3_A (Gen. Alarm) B32 C32

Input/output signals

Page - 6 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual ALRS and ALR Module

The ALR module


The ALR module provides as well 3 alarm relays like the ALRS module. The difference to the
ALRS module is in the two binary inputs. The input voltage is adjustable to 24V, 48/60V, 110V
resp. 250V DC. The binary input 1 is used for the clock synchronization of the iSWT. Either an ex-
ternal synch. pulse is connected or the input is alternatively configurable as an input for entering
IRIG-B signals. Additionally the ALR module provides a LED for visual indication of the state for
each binary input and for each alarm output. The LED are visible after removal of the front panel.
For more details refer to chapter 4 commissioning.

Block diagram

X16 X17
24V
IRIG-B 12V
H6
+5V
IRIG-B-Test (S1/4)
5V +12V

250V

i n t e r f a c e s
BI1_A X14 X15
A1
110V
BI1
i n t e r f a c e s

BI1_IN_L
(„USYNC“) BI1_B 48/60V
C3 H5
BI1-Test (S1/2)
24V

250V
BI2_A
A5
BI2 BI2_B
110V
BI2_IN_L
A8 48/60V
BI2-Test (S1/1) H4
24V

K1
X7
A21 ALA1_A X6

ALA1 X5
ALA1_OUT_L
(„EALR“)
ALA1_B H3

s y s t e m
C23
u s e r

K2
X10
ALA2_A
A28 X9
ALA2 X8
ALA2_OUT_L
(„SALR/NDALR“)
H2
ALA2_B
A25

K3
X13
A32 ALA3_A X12

ALA3 X11
(„GENALR“) ALA3_OUT_L
ALA3_B H1
C30

ALR_INFO.vsd/Sheet-1
2008-03-14/DOE

Figure 4: ALR Block diagram

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 7


ALRS and ALR Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Binary inputs

The module ALR provides two electrically isolated inputs BI1 and BI2 with selectable input voltage
levels. As the circuits for the binary inputs comprise rectification, differential DC input signals of ei-
ther polarity can be connected. The output signals of the circuits have TTL level. Binary input BI1 is
alternatively configurable as an input for entering IRIG-B signals.

Relay outputs

The alarm module comprises as well three alarm outputs, switched by relay (K1 – K3). The three
relays provide change over contacts. In the standard setup the break contacts (NC) are used.

BI1/USYNC BI1/USYNC
X17 X16
IRIG B
5 6
X2 9 7 5 3 1 X14 X15
X18 3 4 FAST 10 8 6 4 2
5 31 1 2 SLOW

250V
Park

24V

110V
48/60V
H6 IRIG-B X3
6 42
5V
12V
24V

BI2
5 6
H5 BI1 X19 3 4 FAST BI2
1 2 SLOW 9 7531
X4 10 8 6 4 2

250V
Park

24V

110V
48/60V
H4 BI2

1 Test BI2
S1 Test BI1
n.u.
Test IRIG-B ALA1
X7 X6 X5
K1
H3 ALA1 ALA2
X10 X8
H2 ALA2 K2
X9
ALA3
H1 ALA3 X12
K3

X13 X11

Figure 5: Display and setting elements on the ALR module

Visual Indication

The module ALR provides a LED for visual indication of the state for each binary input and for
each alarm output. They are visible after removal of the front panel. The significations are shown in
the table below:
Table 4: ALR indication
LED Indication
H6 IRIG-B Input energized
H5 Binary Input 1 energized
H4 Binary input 2 energized
H3 Alarm output 1 activated
H2 Alarm output 2 activated
H1 Alarm output 3 activated

Test switch S1

For test purposes the module ALR provides a switch for each of the binary input circuits and for
the IRIG-B circuit. Closing a switch sets the output of the assigned circuit to the active state.
Table 5: Functions of the ALR test switch
Switch Function
S1.1 Binary Input 2 test
S1.2 Binary input 1 test
S1.3 n.u.
S1.4 IRIG-B test

Page - 8 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual ALRS and ALR Module

ALR jumper settings

The function of the ALR jumpers is shown in the table below.


Table 6: Setting options for the ALR module
Jumpers
X2 X3 X4 X5 – X13 X14 – X17
Binary Input 1

250V X2 – 7 / 8 *) open --- --- X14 – X15 *)


110V X2 – 1 / 2 open --- --- X14 – X15
48V / X2 – 3 / 4 open --- --- X14 – X15
60V
24V X2 – 5 / 6 open --- --- X14 – X15
fast X18 / 3 – 4
Input behaviour
slow X18 / 1 - 2
IRIG-B

24V open X3 – 1 / 2 --- --- X16 – X17


12V open X3 – 3 / 4 --- --- X16 – X17
5V open X3 – 5 / 6 --- --- X16 – X17
Binary Input 2
*)
250V --- --- X4 – 7 / 8 --- ---
110V --- --- X4 – 1 / 2 --- ---
48V / --- --- X4 – 3 / 4 --- ---
60V
24V --- --- X4 – 5 / 6 --- ---
fast X19 / 3 – 4
Input behaviour
slow X19 / 1 - 2
Alarm Output 1 Relay K1

NC --- --- --- X5 – X6 *) ---


NO --- --- --- X6 – X7 ---
Alarm Output 2 Relay K2

NC --- --- --- X8 – X9 *) ---


NO --- --- --- X9 – X10 ---
Alarm Output 3 Relay K3

NC --- --- --- X11 – X12 *) ---


NO --- --- --- X12 – X13 ---
NC Break contact
NO Make contact
*) Default setting

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 9


ALRS and ALR Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Pin assignment X1 of the ALR


Table 7: Pin assignment of the ALR

PIN Signalname PIN Signalname PIN Signalname


A1 BI1_A B1 C1
A2 B2 C2
A3 B3 C3 BI1_B
A4 B4 C4
A5 BI2_A B5 C5
A6 B6 C6
A7 B7 C7
A8 BI2_B B8 C8
A9 B9 C9
A10 B10 C10
A11 B11 C11
A12 FGND B12 FGND C12 FGND
A13 B13 C13 ALA1_OUT_L
A14 BI1_IN_L B14 C14 ALA2_OUT_L
A15 BI2_IN_L B15 C15 ALA3_OUT_L
A16 P5V B16 P5V C16 P5V
A17 GND B17 GND C17 GND
A18 P12V B18 P12V C18 P12V
A19 B19 C19
A20 B20 C20
A21 ALA1_A B21 C21
A22 B22 C22
A23 B23 C23 ALA1_B
A24 B24 C24
A25 ALA2_B B25 C25
A26 B26 C26
A27 B27 C27
A28 ALA2_A B28 C28
A29 B29 C29
A30 B30 C30 ALA3_B
A31 B31 C31
A32 ALA3_A B32 C32

Page - 10 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual ALRS and ALR Module

Index:

E O

EALR 3 Operating point 4


Outputs 3
G
P
GALR 3
General alarm 3 Pin assignment
ALR 10
ALRS 6
J Pre- alarm 3
Jumper settings
ALR 9 R
ALRS 5
Receiver alarm 3
Relay contacts 3
N

NDALR 3 S

Signaling relay 3
Supply voltages 4

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 11


ALRS and ALR Module SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Appendix:

List of figures
Figure 1: Block diagram of the alarm relay activation and selection of the signaling contacts ------------------------ 3
Figure 2: Block diagram of the binary input ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Figure 3: Position of the jumper on the ALRS--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Figure 4: ALR Block diagram --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Figure 5: Display and setting elements on the ALR module ----------------------------------------------------------------- 8

List of tables
Table 1: Selection of the operating point for the ALRS input ----------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Table 2: Selection of the relay contacts of the ALRS outputs ----------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Table 3: Pin assignment of the ALRS module ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Table 4: ALR indication------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
Table 5: Functions of the ALR test switch --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Table 6: Setting options for the ALR module ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
Table 7: Pin assignment of the ALR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10

Page - 12 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Chapter 8: The Power Supply

Technical data 4

Displays 6

Connection 7
Power Supply SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Table of contents:

General description ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3


Properties: Benefits: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Functional description ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Technical data: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Displays ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Connection of the power supply ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Redundant power supply --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Inhibit loop------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Index: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Appendix: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
List of figures: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
List of tables: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11

Page - 2 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2006


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Power Supply

General description
Two different power supplies are available for the SWT 3000 units:

Operating voltage: 24 - 60 V DC 110-250 V DC


115-230 V AC
Converter type: BM3882-7D2 LM3882-7D2
SV B SWT3 SV N SWT3
50W AC-DC/DC-DC converters are used. These are characterized by extremely wide input volt-
age ranges, efficient input filters, 4kVrms isolating voltage between input and output and electrically
isolated, individually regulated outputs.

Properties: Benefits:
High efficiency Minimum heat development and low thermal loading

Input/output and output/output Safety in conformance with IEC 60950, VDE 0850
electrically isolated

Wide input voltage ranges Use without matching to the supply voltage

Permanently proof against low Simple handling, optimum equipment self-protection


load and short circuit

No reduction of load Full output power in spec. temperature range

Input under voltage disconnection No malfunctions of the outputs

Temperature monitoring Over temperature protection through disconnection

Closed metal case Additional cooling not necessary

The converters are versatile power supplies suitable for industrial use where particularly high re-
quirements apply. High efficiency which remains practically constant over the entire input voltage
range, maximum reliability, small residual ripple and very good dynamic control properties are the
particular features of these devices. They are suitable for installation in 19" sub racks (DIN 41949-
compliant).
A sub rack can contain two independent SWT 3000 units, in which case each unit requires its own
power supply.
The units must be connected via a socket connector in order to conform with the safety regula-
tions currently applicable.

© SIEMENS AG 2006 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 3


Power Supply SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Functional description
The input voltage is fed to the input capacitor via a fuse, an input filter and an inrush current limit-
ing element. This capacitor supplies the switching transistor of the single-ended converter. Each
output is supplied from a separate winding. The secondary voltage is rectified. The output voltage
ripple is minimized by means of a storage choke and subsequent output filter.

Control circuit

20
Output U 01
filter 1
29 23
3)
forward converter
1)
2)
Input filter

70 kHz

14
Control Output U 02
4) circuit filter 2
17

32 8
Control Output U 03
circuit filter 3 11

26

1) Transient protection in SVN types U01= +5V


2) Transient protection in SVB types U02= +12V
3) Link rectifier in SVN types U03= -12V
4) Inrush current limiting in SVN types

Figure 1: Block diagram of the AC-DC and DC-DC converter type SVB4 and SVN4

Technical data:
Table 1: Overview of technical data

Characteristic Conditions Power supply Power supply type LM Unit


type BM PS 100-373V DC or 85-
PS 24 - 60V DC 264V AC
Input voltage range AC -- min 85 - max. 264 V
Ui DC min 14 - max. 70 min 100 - max. 373 V
Input voltage nom. DC 30 310 V
Input current Unom 2 0.2 A
Input fuse slow- 8 2.5 A
blowing
Output voltage 5V min 5.07 - max. min 5.07 - max. 5.13 V
5.13
Output voltage 12V min 11.93 max. min 11.93 max. 12.07 V
12.07
Ambient temperature min-25 - max. min-25 - max. +71 °C
+71

Page - 4 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2006


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Power Supply

Control circuit: The control circuit monitors the output voltage U01 and generates the
control signal for the switching transistor on the primary side taking into
account the maximum permissible output currents. The control signal is
fed back to the switching transistor via a transformer for the purpose of
electrical isolation. The secondary outputs U02 and U03 are controlled
individually and independently and each have their own current limiting
system. If one of the secondary outputs is operating in current limiting
mode the voltages of the other outputs are also reduced.
Fuse: A fuse holder mounted on the rear of the unit holds a 5x20mm fuse which
protects the unit against major damage. For input voltages >200 V DC
an external fuse or a protection switch at system level is recommended
additionally.
Table 2: Fuses used in the converter types
Converter type Fuse Fuse type
SVB4 slow-blowing 8 A / 250V
SVN4 slow-blowing 4 A / 250V

Disconnection: An internal inhibit signal disconnects the outputs below about 0,8*Umin
and above about 1.1*Umax.
Inrush current: When switching on for the first time an NTC thermistor in the input circuit
reduces the inrush current surge by a factor of about 5...10. This protects
connector junctions and switches against possible damage. Repeated
start-up operations at short intervals reduce the effect of the NTC with the
result that the inrush current surge increases.
Inhibit input: The inhibit input enables the output voltages to be switched on and off by
means of logic signal Uinh (TTL, CMOS). If this function is not used the
inhibit input (No. 2) must be connected to the minus pole of output
1, (No. 23) in order to enable the outputs. This connection is routed via
the module slots in the SWT 3000 system. If a module is removed or not
correctly installed the power supply to the unit is disconnected.
Installation: The power supply connection must comply with the regulations in force in
the particular country. Only the socket connector (Fig. 8.3 ) is to be used
for the cabling. Other types of connection do not guarantee compliance
with the safety regulations in every case. The units correspond to protec-
tion class I. Installations in compliance with protection class II require ad-
ditional insulating access protection around the housing of the power
supply. If a second fuse is necessary this must be provided in the incom-
ing line to terminal no. 29 of the power supply unit.

© SIEMENS AG 2006 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 5


Power Supply SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Displays

LED displays are provided on the front panel of the power supply unit.
Their significance is explained in the following table.

Output

disable
operate
1 2 3

overload

Figure 2: Front view of the power supply for mains operation

Table 3: Significance of the LED displays on the power supply unit

LED Conditions Significance


operate Ui min ≤ Ui ≤ Ui max / Io≤ Io nom Unit in normal operation
TC ≤ Tcmax / Uinh ≤ 0.8V
operate and over- Ui min ≤ Ui ≤ Ui max / TC ≤ Tcmax Current at output U01, U02 or U03
load 1, 2 or 3 Uinh ≤ 0.8V too high

disable Ui min ≤ Ui ≤ Ui max Uinh > 0.8V


Io≤ Io nom Unit switched off or PU or CLE
TC ≤ Tcmax not inserted.

disable Ui min ≤ Ui ≤ Ui max / Io≤ Io nom; Temperature monitoring has


Uinh ≤ 0.8V operated

disable Io≤ Io nom Under voltage or overvoltage


TC ≤ Tcmax monitoring has operated
Uinh ≤ 0.8V
Ui =Input voltage

Page - 6 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2006


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Power Supply

Connection of the power supply

SV ALRS FOM2 CLE/FOM1 PU3 IFC-1 IFC-2


X1 X2 X6 X3 X4

C1 C1
SSB 1 3 1 3
A1 A1 C1 A1
2

2 4 2 4
8
1 3 1 3

11

14
2 4 2 4
17
1 3 1 3
X42 X41
20 3 3
2 2
23 *1 * 1
2 4 2 4
26 SSR 1 3 1 3

N(+) 29

L1(-) 32
C32 A32 C32 A32 C32 A32 2 4 2 4

SC

* loop position / Modul ausblenden

Figure 3: Terminals of the power supply (SV X1)

Table 4: Assignment of the terminals


Terminal Power supply type LM 3882-7D2 Power supply type BM 3882-7D2
pin PS 100-373V DC or 85-264V AC PS 24 - 60V DC
2 Inhibit Inhibit
5 Power fail. Power fail.
8 Output U03 GND Output U03 GND
11 Output U03 –12.4V Output U03 –12.4V
14 Output U02 +12.4V Output U02 +12.4V
17 Output U02 GND Output U02 GND
20 Output U01 +5.4V Output U01 +5.4V
23 Output U01 GND Output U01 GND
26 Protective ground Protective ground
29 Neutral N terminal Input voltage +
32 Phase P terminal Input voltage -

© SIEMENS AG 2006 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 7


Power Supply SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Redundant power supply

One or two power supplies can be used in the SWT 3000 system. Decoupling is provided by
means of diodes on the rear PC board. The output voltages from PS-1 and PS-2 are monitored by
the PU3f module in order to detect failure of a power supply unit.
The interface modules IFC are supplied via the PU3f.

PS-1 +5V P5_PS1 V1 P5


+12V P12_PS1 V2 P12

-12V N12_PS1 V3 N12


ALRS
GND GND GND

GNDS GNDS GNDS


PON_PS1

PS-2 +5V P5_PS2 V4 P5


(Option) CLE
+12V P12_PS2 V5 P12

-12V N12_PS2 V6 N12 or


FOM
GND GND GND
GNDS GNDS GNDS
(Option)
PON_PS2
PON_PS2
PON_PS1
N12_PS1
N12_PS2

P12_PS1
P12_PS2

PON_PU
P5_PS1
P5_PS2
GNDS
GND

N12

P12
PU3f P5
P12_R

P12_R
GND

GND
P5

P5

IFC[x]-1 IFC[x]-2
(Option)

Figure 4: Block diagram of the redundant power supply

Page - 8 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2006


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Power Supply

Inhibit loop

The presence of the PU3f and CLE/FOM-1 modules is monitored by an inhibit loop. If the PU3f
and/or CLE are pulled this interrupts the monitoring loop and the secondary voltages from PS1 and
PS2 (if present) are disconnected.

BPSWT 3000

PU3f CLE/FOM1 FOM2


c21
PS2
a21 c21 a21 c21 a21
GND

PS
X41 X42

1 2 3 1 2 3
GND GND PS1

Figure 5: Inhibit loop for the power supply(ies)

An On/Off switch (PS) on the PU3f (not accessible from outside) also in-
terrupts this monitoring loop.
If only the CLE resp FOM1 module is not used the jumper X41 must be
inserted in position 1-2.
If the FOM2 is not used the jumper X42 must be in position 1-2.

© SIEMENS AG 2006 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 9


Power Supply SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Index:

B I

Block diagram 4 Inhibit 9


Inhibit input 5
Inhibit loop 9
C

Connection 7 L
Control circuit 5
Converter type 3 LED 6

D P

Decoupling 8 Properties 3
Description of function 4
Displays 6
R

F Redundant power supply 8

Fuse 5
T

Technical data 4
Terminals 7

Page - 10 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2006


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Power Supply

Appendix:

List of figures:
Figure 1: Block diagram of the AC-DC and DC-DC converter type SVB4 and SVN4 ----------------------------------- 4
Figure 2: Front view of the power supply for mains operation ------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Figure 3: Terminals of the power supply (SV X1) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Figure 4: Block diagram of the redundant power supply -------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Figure 5: Inhibit loop for the power supply(ies) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9

List of tables:
Table 1: Overview of technical data---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Table 2: Fuses used in the converter types -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Table 3: Significance of the LED displays on the power supply unit--------------------------------------------------------- 6
Table 4: Assignment of the terminals--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7

© SIEMENS AG 2006 Edition p3_3_x 08/09 Page - 11


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Chapter 9: Technical Data


Technical Data SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Table of contents:

Command Input/Output ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3


Input IFC-P/IFC-D---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Command output IFC-P ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Command Output IFC-D--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Signaling Output IFC-S ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Transmission via Digital Networks---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Digital Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Transmission time * -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Security----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Dependability ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Transmission via Analog Network ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Modulation type ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Broadband equipments ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Narrowband modulation---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Transmission time (SWT 3000 stand alone)* --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Transmission time (SWT 3000 integrated into PowerLink)* --------------------------------------------------------------- 5
SWT 3000 Fibre optic module FOM ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Technical data FOBox------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6
Security----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Dependability ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Voice frequency interface CLE ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Power supply ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7
Input voltage ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Power consumption --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Alarm output ALRS module----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Alarm output ALR module ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
Binary input ALR module ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Clock-Synchronization Input ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Network management ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Service PC---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Immunity --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Emission---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Mechanical design ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
Dimensions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
Weight ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
Insulation Withstand Voltage---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Impulse Withstand Level 1,2/50µs --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Climatic Conditions--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Mechanical Conditions ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
International Standards ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10

Page - 2 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Technical Data

Command Input/Output

Input IFC-P/IFC-D

Nominal input voltage *) 24V – 250 V DC (tolerance -20% +15%)

Threshold 70% of the adjusted input voltage (24, 48/60, 110,


250V)

Polarity independence Yes

Pulse suppression 1 ms (up to max.100 ms programmable in steps of 1


ms)
*) Regardless of the adjusted input voltage the max. voltage 287,5 V DC can be connected

Command output IFC-P

Contact type Relay NO

Switching power (max.) 250 VA

Switching voltage (max.) 350 V DC or peak AC

Switching current (max.) 1,5 A DC or peak AC

Switching current (max.) <2,5 ms 5 A DC or peak AC

Carry current 2,5 A DC or peak AC

Insulation withstand voltage 2,5 kV rms

Command Output IFC-D

Contact type Relay NO, heavy duty

Switching power 150 W (DC)


1250 VA (AC)

Switching voltage (max.) 380 V DC or peak AC


220 V DC
Switching current (max.) 5 A DC or peak AC (30A≤0,5ms)

Carry current (max) 5 A DC or peak AC

Insulation withstand voltage 2,5 kV rms

Signaling Output IFC-S

See IFC-D

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 3


Technical Data SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Transmission via Digital Networks

Digital Interface

64 Kb/s X21 or
G703.1
2 Mb/s G703.6 sym. 120 Ohm
G703.6 asym. 75 Ohm

Transmission time *

64 Kb/s < 5ms

2 Mb/s < 3ms

*Values are given for the IFC-P module. If the IFC-D module is used all specified signal transmission delays are prolonged
by about ≤ 4 ms

Security

PUC < 10-8

Dependability

PMC < 10-4 at BER of 10-6

Transmission via Analog Network

Modulation type

F6 modulation (FSK) or coded tripping CT

Broadband equipments

Trip frequencies 0,3 to 2,03 kHz

Guard 2,61 or 3,81 kHz

Narrowband modulation

Channel 1 0,63 to 1,26 kHz

Channel 2 1,64 to 2,27 kHz

Channel 3 2,65 to 3,28 kHz

Channel 4 3,16 to 3,79 kHz

Page - 4 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Technical Data

Transmission time (SWT 3000 stand alone)*

Broad band equipment


Single purpose < 10ms (F6, CT)
Alternate multi purpose F2 < 15ms (F6, CT)
Narrowband equipment < 15ms (F6)

* Values are given for the IFC-P module. If the IFC-D module is used all specified signal transmission delays are pro-
longed by about ≤ 4 ms
Operation via the PLC system ESB 2000i will prolong the transmission time by about 4ms

Transmission time (SWT 3000 integrated into PowerLink)*


Broad band equipment

Single purpose < 10ms (F6, CT)

Alternate multi purpose


F2 + AMP < 15ms (F6, CT)
Alternate multi purpose
DP + AMP < 19ms (F6, CT)
Simultaneous multipurpose < 10ms (F6, CT)
Narrow band equipments

Using speech-plus band < 19ms (F6, CT)

*Values are given for the IFC-P module. If the IFC-D module is used all specified signal transmission delays are prolonged
by about ≤ 4 ms
Operation via the PLC system ESB 2000i will prolong the transmission time by about 4ms

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 5


Technical Data SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

SWT 3000 Fibre optic module FOM

Module Type FOL1 FOS1 FOS2


Long range SM Short range SM Short range MM
Optical module SFP-Transceiver
Connector Industry standard duplex LC connector
Wavelength class (nm) 1550 1310 850
Average output power (dBm) max: 0 -8 -3
min: -5 -15 -10
Maximum input power (dBm) -10 -8 0
64 kbit/s -48 -48 -17
Minimum input power (dBm) 2 Mbit/s -38 -32 -17
to PowerLink --- -28 -17
64 kbit/s 43 33 7
Optical budget (dB) 2 Mbit/s 33 17 7
to PowerLink --- 13 7
64 kbit/s 154 87 2
Range [km] 2 Mbit/s 118 45 2
Depending on the fiber to PowerLink --- 34 2

Used values for calculation 1550 nm SM 0,28 db/km


of the range in km 1310 nm SM 0,38 db/km
(incl. Splices) 850 nm MM 3,5 db/km
SM = single mode fiber
MM = multi mode fiber

Technical data FOBox

Power Supply
Input voltage 20 – 72 V DC / 22 – 60 V AC
Power Consumption max. 3,5 W

Alarm Output
Contact type Changeover contact
Switching power max. 1250 VA / 150 W
Switching voltage max. 380 V AC / 220 V DC
Continuous current 5 A AC/DC

Mechanical Design
Dimensions (approx) 230x110x60 mm
(mounting onto DIN rail)
Insulation withstand voltage
Power supply 2,5 kVrms
Alarm outputs 2,5 kVrms
Digital input/output
G703.6 sym. 500 Vrms

Page - 6 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Technical Data

Security

improved by INC < 10-6

Dependability

improved by INC < 10-4 at SNR of 6 dB

Voice frequency interface CLE

Transmitter
Impedance 600 Ohm
Level (max.) +15 dBm
Receiver
Impedance 600 Ohm or 6 kOhm
Level range -40 dB to + 4 dB

Power supply

Input voltage

24/48/60 V DC (-20% / +15%)

110/220/250 V DC (-20% / +15%) or


115 /230 V AC (15% / +10%) 47 Hz – 63 Hz

Power consumption

approx. 22 W / VA

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 7


Technical Data SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Alarm output ALRS module


Number of alarm outputs 3 or 6 relay contacts (with two modules)

Contact type Change over contact

Switching power max. 300 W (DC)


1000 VA

Switching voltage max. 250 V DC or peak AC

Switching current max 5 A DC or peak AC

Carry current 1 A DC or peak AC

Alarm output ALR module


Number of alarm outputs 3 or 6 relay contacts (with two modules)

Contact type Change over contact

Switching power max. 300 W (DC)


1000 VA

Switching voltage max. 250 V DC or peak AC

Switching current max 5 A DC or peak AC

Carry current 1 A DC or peak AC

Binary input ALR module


Nominal voltage Binary Input 1 *) 24V – 250 V DC (tolerance -20% + 15%)

Polarity independence Yes

Nominal voltage IRIG-B input 5V; 12V, 24V (tolerance ±15%)

Polarity independence No! Defined polarity required

Nominal voltage Binary Input 2 *) 24V – 250 V DC (tolerance -20% + 15%)

Polarity independence Yes

*) Regardless of the adjusted input voltage the max. voltage of 287,5 V DC can be connected

Clock-Synchronization Input

Nominal input voltage 24 V – 250 V DC (-20% / +15%)

Digital input IRIG-B 5V – 250 V DC

Ethernet NTP, Network Time Protocol

Network management
SNMPv2 on Ethernet Interface 10/100 BaseT

Page - 8 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual Technical Data

Service PC

Interface 9,6 kbps


RS 232/Sub-D 9 pol.

Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC

Immunity

Electrostatic discharge 8kV (contact discharge)

Radiated electromagnetic fields 10 V/m (80 – 2000 MHz)

Bursts
Power supply 4 kV
Data lines 4 kV
Surges
Common mode (line-to-line) 4 kV
Differential mode (line-to-ground) 2 kV
Direct coupling into shield
(communication cable) 2 kV
Conducted disturbances 10 Veff (150 kHz – 80 MHz)

Damped oscillatory waves


Common mode (line-to-line) 2,5 kV
Differential mode (line-to-ground) 2,5 kV
Direct coupling into shield
(communication cable) 2,5 kV

Emission

HF disturbance emission EN 50081-2


(20 – 1000 MHz) Limit Class B

Mechanical design

Dimensions
ES 902 C (19“ inch)

482.6 240
37.4

132
132

57.15

84TE=426.72
465.1

Weight
approx. 5 kg (one SWT 3000 in ES 902 C frame)

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 9


Technical Data SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Insulation Withstand Voltage

VF input/output 500 Vrms

Power supply 2,5 kVrms

Command input / output 2,5 kVrms

Alarm outputs 2,5 kVrms

Digital input / output


G703.1 500 Vrms
G703.6 sym. 500 Vrms

Impulse Withstand Level 1,2/50µs

VF input / output 1 kV

Digital input / output 1 kV

Power supply 5 kV

Command input / output 5 kV

Alarm outputs 5 kV

Climatic Conditions

During operation -5°C to + 55°C

During storage and transport -40°C to +70°C

Relative humidity 5 – 95%

max. abs. humidity (no condensation) 29 g/m3

Mechanical Conditions

Degree of protection IP 20

Vibration 5 – 9 Hz: 1,5 mm amplitude

9 – 200 Hz:
0,5 g acceleration
Shock 10 g acceleration

International Standards

Performance and testing of teleprotection transmis- IEC 60834-1 second edition 1999-10
sion equipments of power systems
Power supply and electromagnetic compatibility IEC 60870-2-1

Environmental conditions IEC 60870-2-2

Product safety EN 60950

Page - 10 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Chapter 10: SNMP and Remote Access

Overview remote access and remote monitoring 7

SNMP Function 8

Polling device data 10

SNMP Traps 11

Installation 13

Commissioning 16

Remote access 20
SNMP and Remote Access SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Table of contents:

General safety regulations............................................................................................................................................ 3


Transport and storage ................................................................................................................................................. 4
Installation .................................................................................................................................................................. 5
Equipment manual .................................................................................................................................................. 6
Installation procedure ................................................................................................................................................. 6
Grounding................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Overview remote access and remote monitoring ....................................................................................................... 7
1. Remote access via intranet (TCP/IP) .................................................................................................................. 7
2. Remote access via modem.................................................................................................................................. 7
3. Remote monitoring via in-band RM channel...................................................................................................... 7
SNMP............................................................................................................................................................................. 8
General information.................................................................................................................................................... 8
SNMP function ........................................................................................................................................................... 8
Functional diagram ................................................................................................................................................. 9
Polling of the SWT 3000 Device data ...................................................................................................................... 10
SWT 3000 read general information..................................................................................................................... 10
SWT 3000 read hardware configuration............................................................................................................... 10
SWT 3000 set commands ..................................................................................................................................... 10
Spontaneous indication SNMP traps ........................................................................................................................ 11
General traps......................................................................................................................................................... 11
SNMP agent specific traps.................................................................................................................................... 11
SWT 3000 alarms ................................................................................................................................................. 12
Installation of the SNMP............................................................................................................................................ 13
Connection principle of the SNMP server ............................................................................................................ 13
Installation instructions for the SNMP adapter in a SWT 3000 device: ................................................................... 14
Commissioning SNMP................................................................................................................................................ 16
LED Indicators.......................................................................................................................................................... 16
RS232 interface ........................................................................................................................................................ 16
Activated ports...................................................................................................................................................... 16
IP Address............................................................................................................................................................. 16
Web login ................................................................................................................................................................. 17
Setting options ...................................................................................................................................................... 19
Trap destination configuration.............................................................................................................................. 19
NMS commissioning ............................................................................................................................................ 19
Network time protocol NTP ................................................................................................................................. 19
SWT 3000 Remote Access .......................................................................................................................................... 20
General information.................................................................................................................................................. 20
Remote access examples....................................................................................................................................... 21
RM in-band channel ................................................................................................................................................... 23
Index directory............................................................................................................................................................ 25
Appendix ..................................................................................................................................................................... 26
List of figures............................................................................................................................................................ 26
List of tables ............................................................................................................................................................. 26

Page - 2 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual SNMP and Remote Access

General safety regulations


This manual does not represent a complete list of all safety measures re-
quired for the operation of equipment (module, device) because addi-
tional measures may be necessary under specific operating conditions. It
does, however, contain instructions that you must observe for your per-
sonal safety and for avoiding damage to equipment. These instructions
are highlighted by a warning triangle as shown below according to the
degree of danger.

!
Danger
signifies that death, serious physical injury or substantial material dam-
age will occur if appropriate precautionary measures are not taken.
Warning

! signifies that death, serious physical injury or substantial material dam-


age may occur if appropriate precautionary measures are not taken.
Caution
signifies that minor physical injury or material damage may occur if ap-
propriate precautionary measures are not taken.
Qualified personnel Start-up and operation of equipment described in this manual (module,
device) may only be carried out by qualified personnel. For the purpose
of this instruction and product labels, a qualified person is one who is fa-
miliar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment
and the hazards involved. In addition, he has the following qualifications:
> Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and
tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety prac-
tices.
> Is trained in the proper care and use of SWT 3000 equipment in accor-
dance with established safety practices.
> Is trained in rendering first aid.
Please note the following:
The equipment must only be used for the applications described in the

! catalogue and the technical description and only in conjunction with third
party devices and components recommended or approved by Siemens.
Perfect and reliable operation of the product is conditional upon proper
transport, storage, installation and assembly as well as correct operation
and proper maintenance.
When operating electrical equipment certain components inevitably carry
a dangerous voltage. Serious physical injury or material damage can oc-
cur if the equipment is not handled properly:
z Equipment must be grounded before any connections are wired up.
z Dangerous voltages can be present in all circuit sections connected to
the power supply.
z Even after the power supply has been disconnected there may still be
dangerous voltages present in the equipment (charge stored on a capaci-
tor).
z Equipment with current transformer circuits must not be operated in the
open state.
z The limits specified in this product document must not be exceeded; this
must also be taken into account in testing and on start-up.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 3


SNMP and Remote Access SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

!
Warning!
The equipment may be supplied by different and from each other inde-
pendent dangerous voltages. Before opening the equipment and starting
the maintenance work, the device must be isolated with the specified cir-
cuit breaker.

This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the member states re-
lating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive
89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified
voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 2006/95/EC).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to Article
10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN
61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 (for EMC Directive) and with the standard
EN 60950-1 (for Low-Voltage Directive) by Senton. The device is de-
signed and manufactured for application in industrial environment.
These devices are designed for use in the industrial sector and fulfil the following requirements:
Emitted interference: EN 61000-6-4: 2001
Immunity to interference: EN 61000-6-2: 2005
For use in residential areas you also need the individual authorization of a national authority or
test agency with respect to emitted interference.
The test and connection jacks accessible at the front are not isolated interfaces and are only used
for maintenance purposes. The usual ESD measures must be observed in use. This also applies
for the use of telephone connection sockets (if present).
All signal and data cables are shielded and connection of the shielding over a large area must be
provided at both ends.
IZIER
TIF TE
R
The products and systems listed here are manufactured and marketed
ZE

DIN ISO 9001


using a DQS-certified quality management system in accordance with
DIN ISO 9001 (Certificate Registration Number 000876 QM UM). The
DQS certificate is recognized in all EQ network countries (Reg. No.:876)
M
QU

LIT
TE

YS
A

ÄT TS
SMA
NAGEMEN

Transport and storage

The limit values specified below must not be exceeded during transport and storage of PowerLink
devices and individual modules. They may only be transported in their unopened original packag-
ing.
If stored in their unopened original packaging there are no additional requirements for the storage
room apart from the values for temperature and humidity specified below. If stored unpacked or
partially unpacked please ensure that the devices and modules are stored in maintained, dry and
dust-free rooms.
permissible ambient temperature -40° to +70°C
relative humidity 5 to 95%

Page - 4 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual SNMP and Remote Access

Installation

CAUTION !
Electrostatic sensitive devices
Electrostatic sensitive devices are protected against destruction by electrostatic charge by means
of protective structures at the inputs and outputs. In unfavourable cases, however, plastic floor co-
verings, non-conductive work surfaces, or clothing containing artificial fibres can result in such high
charges that electrostatic sensitive devices can be damaged or even destroyed despite the
protective networks mentioned. If a device is damaged its reliability decreases drastically, al-
though it may be a long time before the effects of the damage are noticeable.
In order to ensure that electrostatic charges are eliminated harmless when working on the system
you must observe the following points without fail:

1. Before carrying out any work on the 2. When working on modules always place
system ground yourself with a wrist strap. them on a grounded, conductive surface

3. Only transport modules in suitable pro-


tective bags.

The following points must also be observed during installation:

DANGER!

!
The device has to be installed in a locked room, with admission for com-
missioning personal only. It must be excluded that other persons except
the commissioning personal has access to this equipment.
ATTENTION!
Sufficient cooling has to be provided!

1. Before installing the device the ground- 2. Connect the grounding wire immediately
ing wire must first be laid and connected to after installing the device or setting up the
ground potential. cabinet.

3. Use shoe grounding strips.

Warning!
There is a risk of electrostatic discharge up until the grounding wire has
been connected even if you are wearing a wrist strap. If possible you
should therefore not touch modules and wiring before then.
When dismantling the system the grounding wire must not be discon-
nected until all work has been completed.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 5


SNMP and Remote Access SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Equipment manual

The equipment manual is written for service and operation personnel


in the high voltage power line environment. All existing safety instructions
in the client's environment have to be observed and only trained and
instructed personnel is authorized to work with the equipment.

Installation procedure

The main steps in the installation procedure are listed below:


z Transport device or cabinet to the installation room in its packaging
z Unpack and dispose of transport packaging
z Check delivery for completeness and for mechanical damage
z Secure cabinet to the floor or wall, or install device in cabinet or rack
z Connect grounding wire
z Cable the interface modules to the protection relays
z Cable the alarm outputs
z Connect the power supply

SWT 3000 devices can be supplied as standalone devices or installed in


a cabinet together with other system components. In case of delivery in
a cabinet the entire cabling of the individually installed devices is in-
stalled at the factory up to the connection terminals on the assembly
board. In this case the connection points for the cabling can be found
in the supplied cabinet documentation.

Grounding

Caution !

The cross-sectional area of the earth wire must be equal or greater to the
cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the de-
vice. The cross-section of the earth wire must be at least 2.5 qmm.
The cross section of the grounding wire and the laying of the wire must
comply with the regulations applicable for the place of installation.

Page - 6 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual SNMP and Remote Access

Overview remote access and remote monitoring


The following examples show the possibilities for remote access resp. remote monitoring of the
SWT 3000 system.

1. Remote access via intranet (TCP/IP)

LAN
1a SNMP 1a remote acces via SNMP
NMS
agent and NMS
SNMP SWT 3000
Agent
1b PowerSys 1b remote acces via SNMP
agent and PowerSys service
program
LAN

1c 1c remote acces via RAS and


RAS SWT 3000 PowerSys service program
PowerSys

Figure 1: Remote access via intranet

2. Remote access via modem

Modem Modem Remote acces via RAS, modem


and PowerSys service program
RAS PSTN RAS SWT 3000

Figure 2: Remote access via modem

3. Remote monitoring via in-band RM channel

Remote monito-
3a RM
ring via RM in-
SWT 3000 in-band SWT 3000 SWT 3000
channel band channel and
PowerSys PowerSys service
program
RM addr. 1 RM addr. 2 RM addr. 3

LAN

3b RM
in-band SWT 3000 SWT 3000
RAS SWT 3000 channel
PowerSys

RM addr. 1 RM addr. 2 RM addr. 3


3b Remote monitoring in combination with 1b, 1c and 2a is possible

Figure 3: Remote monitoring via in-band RM channel

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 7


SNMP and Remote Access SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

SNMP

General information

The SNMP Terminal Server contains OSS - Open Source Software (µCLinux and Net-SNMP). For
the copyright notice, list of conditions, disclaimer information kindly refer to the referenced source.
Open Source Software for µCLinux as well as detailed license information documentation is avail-
able and delivered with the PowerSys CD ROM.

SNMP function

The SNMP server allows the request of system parameters and a limited control (commands) of
the SWT 3000 from a central NMS (network management system) via TCP/IP. The SNMP server
provides an image of the SWT 3000 status. Spontaneous alarm indications (traps) are transmitted
to the NMS. Alternatively the remote access of the service program PowerSys via the SNMP server
is also possible and has higher priority. This means during an existing connection with the service
program the SNMP data base is not updated. This status is reported with a spontaneous indication
(trap) to the NMS.

Station A Station B Station C


SWT3000 SWT3000 SWT3000 RM SWT3000
SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB

Terminal Server Terminal Server Terminal Server


TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IP

Hub / Switch

Remote access Remote monitoring


Intranet (LAN)
PowerSys
Office

Network
Management

RM In-band remote monitoring channel

Figure 4: SNMP & Remote access via IP network

The terminal server is delivered with firmware for SNMP and remote access support of
SWT 3000. The minimum setting of the SNMP server is:
• Local IP address
• Trap destination(s) IP address
• Trap delay and repetition suppression
• Community string
• Configuration via web browser (password protected)

Page - 8 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual SNMP and Remote Access

Functional diagram

The figure below shows a functional diagram of the SNMP system:

Figure 5: SNMP Functional diagram

Components:
• TCP/IP protocol stack:
The TCP/IP protocol stack handles the internet communication of the LAN1. The
LAN2 interface is not used!
• SNMP
Handling of the SNMP access of the spontaneous indication (traps)
• MIB
The management information base (MIB), contains the status information of the
SWT 3000 system.
• IPC
Inter process communication for communication and synchronization of the proc-
esses.
• Poll
Polling function for the cyclic request of the status information from the connected
device.
• Communicator
Management of the RS232 interface. Switch over between polling mode and direct
connection of the service program.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 9


SNMP and Remote Access SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

• RS232 tunnel
RAS function of the server for direct connection of the PowerSys program via
TCP/IP. This function blocks the SNMP function and is indicated with the trap “Pow-
erSys session active”.
• Config.
Configuration data base of SNMP server.
• Port1
RS232 interface1 for the communication between the SNMP server and the
SWT 3000 device.

Polling of the SWT 3000 Device data

The SNMP server generates during the start up procedure an image of all configuration parame-
ter and polls cyclic the status information of the connected SWT 3000 device according MIB. The
configuration parameter are refreshed after new start of the SNMP server resp. after recovering of
an interrupted serial connection to the SWT 3000. The data of the SWT3000 event recorder are
read only after request from the NMS.

SWT 3000 read general information

The following information can be read:


• SWT 3000 hardware information
PU3 hardware release, DLE hardware release, IFC1 hardware release, IFC2 hard-
ware release
• SWT 3000 counter (max. 24 inputs, max. outputs)
Input number and counter value, output number and counter value
• SWT 3000 Event recorder
Recorder sequence number, time stamp, event group and event number, event de-
scription

SWT 3000 read hardware configuration

The following hardware configuration can be read:


• System configuration
Operation mode, purpose, VF variant, analog interface, digital interface. primary
path, secondary path, Tx / Rx address, coded transmission, permissive or direct trip-
ping, IFC1/2 type
• RM configuration
RM address, master, slave

SWT 3000 set commands

The following commands can be set from the NMS:


Reset device, SWT line select, LID local loop, LID remote loop

Page - 10 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual SNMP and Remote Access

Spontaneous indication SNMP traps

Spontaneous indication from the SWT 3000 device are transmitted from the SNMP server to the
configured Network Management Systems. Up to 6 NMS can be configured for receiving this traps.
Each trap is sent with a severity (1-5) with the following signification:
Table 1: Alarm severity
Alarm severity Signification
1 Critical
2 Major
3 Minor
4 Warning
5 Normal

General traps

• Cold start (severity 1)


A cold start trap signifies that the SNMP server is reinitializing itself and that its con-
figuration may have been altered.
• Authentication failure (severity 2)
An authentication failure trap signifies that the SNMP has received a protocol mes-
sage that is not properly authenticated.

SNMP agent specific traps

• agentLinkstatus (value 0, severity 1)


This trap is transmitted when the RS232 connection between the SNMP server and
the SWT 3000 is interrupted.
• agentLinkstatus (value 1. severity 1)
This trap is transmitted when an interrupted RS232 connection between the SNMP
server and the SWT 3000 is successfully recovered.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 11


SNMP and Remote Access SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

SWT 3000 alarms

Two events (active/not active) are assigned to each alarm and transmitted to the programmed
NMS in case of a change of state during a configured time period. Cyclic repetitive alarms within an
adjustable time period are transmitted once only. Each alarm contains the severity level and a short
description of the event.
The following SWT 3000 alarms are transmitted from the SNMP server:
• alarmPowerSysSession (severity 5)
A PowerSys session occupies the serial interface to the SWT 3000. SNMP data can’t
be refreshed during this time.
• alarmHardware (severity 1)
The SWT 3000 device reports hardware alarm. One or more configured hardware
components are not available or faulty.
• alarmConfiguration (severity 1)
The SWT 3000 reports configuration alarm. The adjusted device configuration is not
valid.
• alarmGeneral (severity 1)
The SWT 3000 reports general alarm
• alarmNonUrgent (severity 2)
The SWT 3000 reports non urgent alarm
• alarmRx (severity 1)
The SWT 3000 reports receiver alarm

Page - 12 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual SNMP and Remote Access

Installation of the SNMP

Connection principle of the SNMP server

The figure below shows the connection principle for the SNMP server.

Use crossed
cables in case of
direct connection

Figure 6: Connection principle

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 13


SNMP and Remote Access SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Installation instructions for the SNMP adapter in a SWT 3000 device:

A DC/DC converter module converts the ± 5V of the SWT 3000 to ± 12V for the SNMP adapter.
Along with the SNMP adapter and the converter module, all necessary cables and mounting
hardware are provided:
A 1 SNMP adapter
B 1 Bracket for SNMP adapter
C 1 Adapter connector for SNMP adapter
D 1 DC/DC converter module
E 8 Screws M2,5x20
F 8 spacers (11mm long)
G 1 long cable (connects SWT 3000 power source with DC/DC converter)
H 1 short cable (connects DC/DC converter with SNMP adapter)
J 2 cable ties
K 2 cable tie holders
L 2 plastic rivets
M 2 slotted screws
N 8 screws M2,5x8 for SWT 3000 with single power supply higher SNMP adapter
brackets
The figure below shows the wiring diagram for the SNMP adapter:

Figure 7: Wiring diagram

Page - 14 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual SNMP and Remote Access

Perform the following steps to assemble the SNMP adapter kit.


1. Disassemble the rear panel of the device.
2. Assemble the DC/DC converter module to the mainframe, using threads # 9 and 15
(counted from side wall).
• For mainframes with single power supply use 4 screws M2,5x8 (N).
• For mainframes with 2 power supplies use 4 screws M2,5x20 (E) and 4 spacers (F).
3. Assemble the SNMP adapter to its bracket, using 2 slotted screws and 2 plastic riv-
ets.
4. Assemble the SNMP adapter bracket to the mainframe, using threads # 19 and 25
(counted from side wall).
• For older SNMP adapter brackets (approx. 20mm high) use 4 screws M2,5x20 (E)
and 4 spacers (F).
• For newer (higher) SNMP adapter brackets use 4 screws M2,5x8 (N).
5. Connect the SWT 3000 power source to the DC/DC converter module and the
DC/DC converter module to the SNMP adapter as shown in figure 7 on page 14 and
secure the cables with the cable ties (J) and holders (K).
6. Assemble the rear panel of the device.

Figure 8: SWT 3000 chassis for 2 power supplies with SNMP adapter and DC/DC converter

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 15


SNMP and Remote Access SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Commissioning SNMP

LED Indicators

The following LED indicators are located on the top panel of the SNMP terminal adapters.
Table 2: LED indicators
LED Name LED Colour LED Function
Ready Green Power is on and functioning normally
P1/P2 (Tx) Green Serial port 1 / 2 is transmitting
Off Serial port 1 / 2 is not transmitting
P1/P2 (Rx) Yellow Serial port 1 / 2 is receiving data
Off Serial port 1 / 2 is not receiving data

RS232 interface
Table 3: Pin assignment of the Sub D connector
Pin RS232
1 DCD
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS

Activated ports

IP Address
All SNMP server are delivered with the default
IP address: 192.168.3.127 at LAN port 1.

The connected Service PC has to be adjusted


to an IP address in the same network like
192.168.3.1:

Figure 9: Adjustment of the IP address

Page - 16 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual SNMP and Remote Access

Web login

Start the web browser e.g. internet explorer and enter http://192.168.3.127. Login with the Pass-
word “private” (default password, can be changed).

Figure 10: Connection via web browser

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 17


SNMP and Remote Access SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

The following form appears:

Figure 11: SNMP Server form

Page - 18 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual SNMP and Remote Access

Setting options
Table 4: Setting options for the SNMP operating configuration
Parameter Access Range of values Default
DHCP read/write enabled/disabled disabled
IP-Address read/write xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 192.168.3.127
Subnet-Mask read/write xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 255.255.255.0
Gateway Address read/write xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 0.0.0.0
Local-Port (RAS) read/write 10000 - 10100 10001
Product-Id read String MLFB 7VR 9246
Firmware-Version read String Vxx.xx
MAC Address read String xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
Config.-Password write String private (max. 10 characters)

IP –Address
Subnet-Mask have to be set according the customers network
Gateway Address
DHCP
Local Port (RAS)
The address is used for remote access with the service program PowerSys
Config Password
The config. password is requested for the web login and can be changed.

Trap destination configuration

The NMS addresses as well as the community string for set /get has to be adjusted via web
login and must match between the SNMP server and the NMS.
The min active time adjustable between 0 – 3000 sec, is the minimum time the alarm has to be
active before a rising trap is sent.
The fall down delay adjustable between 0 – 3000 sec, is the min time the alarm has to be inac-
tive before a falling trap is sent. Both adjustments are used to prevent a sequence of events in
case of cyclic alarm indications.

NMS commissioning

The necessary MIBs are available on the PowerSys CD provided with the PowerLink system.
They have to be integrated in the NMS. After the NMS has been configured, traps from the SNMP
server are received. It is also possible to read PowerLink (ref. to page 10) resp. iSWT information
(ref. to page Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.) or configuration (ref. to page 10). Commands can
be set as well from the NMS (ref. to page 10).
Access to the PowerLink via the SNMP server is also possible with the PowerSys service pro-
gram. In this case the connection to the NMS is interrupted. A corresponding trap is sent from the
SNMP server.

Network time protocol NTP

Activation of the NTP (NTP synchronization ;) offers the possibility to synchronize the timer of
the iSWT with the network time protocol.
The NTP server is the PC in the network providing the time. Enter either the IP address or the
internet address.
The Time zone is always the GMT. Please select the local deviation (±12h).
The Poll interval describes how often the time is read from the NTP server.

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 19


SNMP and Remote Access SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

SWT 3000 Remote Access

General information

A remote access server (RAS) connection serves complete system functionality administration
identical to local on-site operation. Standard TCP/IP network protocols are used for easy access to
each SWT 3000 from anywhere within a company Intranet. The system can interface with your own
network security systems and firewalls, providing you with just the right security level your company
requires.
The remote access to the SWT 3000 is possible with the service program PowerSys. With the
PowerSys menu <Options / Connection> the connection to the device via serial interface or
TCP/IP has to be configured.

Figure 12: Configuration example for the TCP/IP connection

After the TCP/IP connection has been selected the IP address and port of the remote access
server (RAS) or SNMP server has to be entered.
The service program is connected with the menu <Data source/Device> or the corresponding
button as shown in the figure below.

Data source devi-


ce button.

Figure 13: Connecting the service PC

Page - 20 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual SNMP and Remote Access

Remote access examples

The figure below shows a RAS connection to the SWT3000. Information from the SWT 3000 in
station C can be read via in-band remote monitoring channel if the RM function is activated.

Station A Station B Station C


SWT3000 SWT3000 SWT3000 RM SWT3000
SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB

RAS
*) RS232 RS232
TCP/IP TCP/IP

Remote access Remote monitoring


Intranet (LAN)
Overhead line
*) RAS
orTerminal server RM In-band remote monitoring channel
Office SSB Remote Monitoring interface
SC Service channel interface
SSR Remote access interface SWT3000
RAS Remote access server
PowerSys

Figure 14: RAS connection to the SWT 3000 devices in the station A and B

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 21


SNMP and Remote Access SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

The following example shows a RAS connection via modem. The stations A and C are accessible
via in-band remote monitoring channel and the service RM.

Station A Station B Station C


SWT3000 RM SWT3000 SWT3000 RM SWT3000
SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB

RAS
RS232

Modem

RAS
Remote monitoring Remote access Remote monitoring
Modem

Overhead line
RM In-band remote monitoring channel
Office SSB Remote Monitoring interface
SC Service channel interface
SSR Remote access interface SWT3000
PowerSys RAS Remote access server

Figure 15: RAS connection via modem

Station A Station B Station C


SWT3000 SWT3000 SWT3000 SWT3000
SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB
LID-1 LID-1

RAS MUX MUX


*) RS232 RS232
TCP/IP TCP/IP

RM1 = Slave and 9600 bps

Remote access
Intranet (LAN)
*) RAS Overhead line
orTerminal server
SSF Front interface CSP
RM In-band remote monitoring channel
SSB Remote Monitoring interface
Office SC Service channel interface
SSR Remote access interface SWT3000
RAS Remote access server
LID-1 Digital line interface
PowerSys MUX Multiplexer

Figure 16: The remote access to the SWT 3000 in station C is performed via SC with the LID-1

Page - 22 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual SNMP and Remote Access

RM in-band channel
In the case that no intranet or modems are available, the user can still monitor remote terminals
using the in-band RM channel. With the optional service “Remote Monitoring” (RM), data can be
transmitted between the devices of one or more SWT 3000 routes. The RM function enables the
user to have access via a serial interface with the service program to the following function:
y query of the device data (configuration, parameter, status) of the remote device
y temporary adjustments (e.g. test loops)
y producing a reset
Via an additional interface (service interface backplane SSB) up to 5 transmission routes can be
coupled.
Station 1 Station 2 Station 3....

SWT 3000 SWT 3000 SWT 3000 SWT 3000


Adr.1 Adr.2 Adr.3 Adr.4
SSB

SSB

SSB
coupling of two
SWT 3000 routes

SSF Front interface on the PU3


SSB Back interface

Figure 17: Example of a route coupling with the RM function

Changing of the configuration and parameter (except date / time of the SWT 3000) in the remote
device is possible if the configuration via inband RM channel is activated (see figure below).

Figure 18: Configuration via RM inband channel

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 23


SNMP and Remote Access SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

The figure below shows the remote connection to the SWT 3000 in station A via RAS or terminal
server. The access to the SWT 3000 devices in station B and C is possible when the RM in-band
channel is activated. For the SSB - SSB connection in station B a crossed cable has to be used.
One SSB interface must be configured as “Slave” the other one as “Master”.

Station A Station B Station C


SWT3000 SWT3000 SWT3000 RM SWT3000
SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB SC SSR SSB

*) RS232
TCP/IP Master – Slave con-
nection with crossed
cable

Remote monitoring
Intranet (LAN)
*) RAS Overhead line
Remote access
orTerminal server
RM In-band remote monitoring channel
SSB Remote Monitoring interface
Office SC Service channel interface
SSR Remote access interface SWT3000
RAS Remote access server
PowerSys

Figure 19: Connection to the SWT 3000 in station B and C with the RM function

The PowerSys program is connected with <Data source/Remote device> or using the correspond-
ing button. Subsequently the RM address of the SWT 3000 has to be entered.

Data source remote


device button

Figure 20: Connection of the service PC via RM channel

Page - 24 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


SWT 3000 Equipment Manual SNMP and Remote Access

Index directory
examples 21
Remote monitoring RM 23
C

commissioning 13 S

safety regulations 3
G SNMP
installation 13
Grounding 6 SNMP server 8
functional diagram 9
SNMP traps 11
I
specific 11
SSB 23
Installation procedure 6
SWT 3000
alarms 12
L set commands 10
SWT 3000
LED indicators 16 read information 10

N T

NMS 8 TCP/IP connection 20


temperature 4
Transport 4
P

polling 10 W

Warning 3
R

remote access 20

© SIEMENS AG 2008 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 Page - 25


SNMP and Remote Access SWT 3000 Equipment Manual

Appendix

List of figures

Figure 1: Remote access via intranet.......................................................................................................................... 7


Figure 2: Remote access via modem........................................................................................................................... 7
Figure 3: Remote monitoring via in-band RM channel .............................................................................................. 7
Figure 4: SNMP & Remote access via IP network ..................................................................................................... 8
Figure 5: SNMP Functional diagram ......................................................................................................................... 9
Figure 6: Connection principle................................................................................................................................. 13
Figure 7: Wiring diagram......................................................................................................................................... 14
Figure 8: SWT 3000 chassis for 2 power supplies with SNMP adapter and DC/DC converter ............................... 15
Figure 9: Adjustment of the IP address .................................................................................................................... 16
Figure 10: Connection via web browser..................................................................................................................... 17
Figure 11: SNMP Server form .................................................................................................................................... 18
Figure 12: Configuration example for the TCP/IP connection................................................................................... 20
Figure 13: Connecting the service PC........................................................................................................................ 20
Figure 14: RAS connection to the SWT 3000 devices in the station A and B.............................................................. 21
Figure 15: RAS connection via modem....................................................................................................................... 22
Figure 16: The remote access to the SWT 3000 in station C is performed via SC with the LID-1 ............................. 22
Figure 17: Example of a route coupling with the RM function................................................................................... 23
Figure 18: Configuration via RM inband channel...................................................................................................... 23
Figure 19: Connection to the SWT 3000 in station B and C with the RM function .................................................... 24
Figure 20: Connection of the service PC via RM channel.......................................................................................... 24

List of tables

Table 1: Alarm severity ............................................................................................................................................... 11


Table 2: LED indicators.............................................................................................................................................. 16
Table 3: Pin assignment of the Sub D connector ........................................................................................................ 16
Table 4: Setting options for the SNMP operating configuration................................................................................. 19

Page - 26 Edition p3_3_2x 08/09 © SIEMENS AG 2008


Protection Signaling Equipment SWT 3000

Equipment Manual

Version P3.3.25x

Functional description CLE Module


Installation and Commissioning ALRS and ALR Module
PowerSys Program Power Supply
Interface Modules IFC-x Technical Data
PU3 Module SNMP and Remote Access
Exit

You might also like